diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json b/docs/drs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json index 9550b6b5..7590ad63 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json +++ b/docs/drs/umn/ALL_META.TXT.json @@ -1,2631 +1,5800 @@ [ + { + "dockw":"User Guide" + }, { "uri":"drs_01_0001.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"1", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Service Overview", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Service Overview", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"2", "des":"DRS is a stable, efficient, and easy-to-use cloud service for database migration and synchronization in real time.It simplifies data migration processes and reduces migra", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DRS,What Is DRS?,Service Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Is DRS?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0113.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0113.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"3", "des":"DRS simplifies migration procedures and does not require too much technical knowledge. Traditional migration requires professional technical personnel and migration proce", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Advantages,Service Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Advantages", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0300.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0300.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"4", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Functions and Features", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Functions and Features", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0301.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0301.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"5", "des":"In real-time migration, you only need to configure the source database, destination database, and migration objects. DRS will help you compare and analyze data so you can", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Migration,Functions and Features,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Real-Time Migration", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0303.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0303.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"6", "des":"DRS supports backup migrations of various database types.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backup Migration,Functions and Features,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Backup Migration", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0302.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0302.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"7", "des":"Real-time synchronization refers to the real-time flow of key service data from sources to destinations while consistency of data can be ensured. It is different from mig", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Synchronization,Functions and Features,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Real-Time Synchronization", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0305.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0305.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"8", "des":"DRS supports disaster recovery (DR) management for the following types of databases.DRS supports disaster recovery through a Virtual Private Network (VPN), Direct Connect", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery,Functions and Features,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_08_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_08_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"9", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Mapping Data Types", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Mapping Data Types", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0326.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0326.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"10", "des":"DATE values supported by MySQL range from '1000-01-01' to '9999-12-31'.DATETIME values supported by MySQL range from '1000-01-01 00:00:00' to '9999-12-31 23:59:59'.TIMEST", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"MySQL->GaussDB(for openGauss),Mapping Data Types,User Guide", - "title":"MySQL->GaussDB(for openGauss)", + "kw":"MySQL->GaussDB,Mapping Data Types,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"MySQL->GaussDB", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"drs_01_0337.html", + "uri":"drs_01_0334.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0334.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"11", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"GaussDB(for openGauss)->MySQL,Mapping Data Types,User Guide", - "title":"GaussDB(for openGauss)->MySQL", + "kw":"Oracle->PostgreSQL,Mapping Data Types,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Oracle->PostgreSQL", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_01_0337.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0337.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"12", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"GaussDB->MySQL,Mapping Data Types,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"GaussDB->MySQL", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0005.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"12", + "code":"13", "des":"VPC-based migration refers to a real-time migration that the source and destination databases are in the same VPC or two VPCs that can communicate with each other. No add", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"entrust your account to the administrator,DRS,Basic Concepts,Service Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Basic Concepts", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0012.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0012.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"13", + "code":"14", "des":"You can encrypt data and database connections and increase database account security.Before saving sensitive information and private data in a database, encrypt data to r", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Security Suggestions,Service Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Security Suggestions", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0021.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0021.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"14", + "code":"15", "des":"To begin using DRS, register an account on the official website. When the registration is successful, you can access all cloud services, including DRS and RDS.If you have", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Accessing DRS,Service Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Accessing DRS", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0200.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0200.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"15", + "code":"16", "des":"To improve your experience with DRS, add the Security Administrator permission using IAM in case some functions become unavailable, such as scheduled task startup, automa", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Instructions,Service Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Instructions", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0318.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0318.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"16", + "code":"17", "des":"You understand and agree that your use of this service complies with laws and regulations, including but not limited to legal compliance requirements on data content, dat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Compliance Description,Service Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Compliance Description", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0004.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"17", + "code":"18", "des":"DRS can migrate data from your databases to the RDS databases in the cloud. For more information about RDS, see Relational Database Service User Guide.Supported network t", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"MongoDB databases,Related Services,Service Overview,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Related Services", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0017.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0017.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"18", + "code":"19", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Migration", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Real-Time Migration", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_online_migration.html", + "node_id":"drs_online_migration.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"19", + "code":"20", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"To the Cloud", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"To the Cloud", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0088.html", - "product_code":"drs", - "code":"20", - "des":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", - "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"migration,From MySQL to MySQL,To the Cloud,User Guide", - "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", - "githuburl":"" - }, - { - "uri":"drs_04_0095.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0088.xml", "product_code":"drs", "code":"21", "des":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"migration,From MySQL to MySQL,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_04_0090.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0090.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"22", + "des":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_04_0095.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0095.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"23", + "des":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", + "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MongoDB to DDS,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From MongoDB to DDS", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0031.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0031.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"22", + "code":"24", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Out of the Cloud", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Out of the Cloud", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0100.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"23", + "code":"25", "des":"To start a migration task, the source and destination database users must have permissions listed in the following table. Different types of migration tasks require diffe", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,From MySQL to MySQL,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0101.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0101.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"24", + "code":"26", "des":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From DDS to MongoDB,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From DDS to MongoDB", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0490.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0490.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"25", + "code":"27", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Between Self-built Databases", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Between Self-built Databases", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_1117.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1117.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"26", + "code":"28", "des":"When a task is being started or in the full migration phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.To maintain data co", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,From MySQL to MySQL,Between Self-built Databases,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0010.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"27", + "code":"29", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Management", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"28", + "code":"30", "des":"A complete real-time migration consists of creating a migration task, tracking task progress, analyzing migration logs, and comparing data consistency. By comparing multi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,Step 1: Create a Migration Task,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 1: Create a Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0006.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"29", + "code":"31", "des":"The migration progress of a real-time migration task helps you keep track of the status of the migration task.DRS shows the migration progress using a progress bar, helpi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,Step 2: Query the Migration Progress,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 2: Query the Migration Progress", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0005.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"30", + "code":"32", "des":"Migration logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the migration process. This section describes how to view migration logs to locate and ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view migration logs,Step 3: View Migration Logs,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 3: View Migration Logs", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0007.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"31", + "code":"33", "des":"This section describes how to compare migration items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. By comparing migration objects, you ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"compare migration items,Step 4: Compare Migration Items,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 4: Compare Migration Items", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0007.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"32", + "code":"34", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing Objects", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Managing Objects", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_09_0017.html", + "node_id":"drs_09_0017.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"33", + "code":"35", "des":"During a database migration, accounts need to be migrated separately.During the migration of MySQL databases, there are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Migrating Accounts,Managing Objects,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Migrating Accounts", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_08_0001.html", + "node_id":"drs_08_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"34", + "code":"36", "des":"Parameter comparison helps you check consistency between the source and destination database data to ensure your services will not be affected after being migrated.This s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Parameters for Comparison,Managing Objects,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Parameters for Comparison", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0008.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"35", + "code":"37", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Life Cycle", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Life Cycle", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0005.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"36", + "code":"38", "des":"This section describes how to view details about a migration task, including information about the task, replication instance, and migration.You have logged in to the DRS", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Task Details,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Viewing Task Details", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0006.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"37", + "code":"39", "des":"After a migration task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask start", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Editing Migration Task Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Editing Migration Task Information", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_1135.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1135.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"38", + "code":"40", "des":"During the migration, you may change the password of the source or destination database. As a result, the migration task fails. In this case, you need to change the passw", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"modify,Modifying Connection Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Modifying Connection Information", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0046.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0046.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"39", + "code":"41", "des":"You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration type", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"40", + "code":"42", "des":"For a migration task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the task information, replication ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"edit,Editing a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Editing a Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_09_0100.html", + "node_id":"drs_09_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"41", + "code":"43", "des":"A fault may occur during the migration due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space. After the fault is rectified based on the migration log information, y", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resuming a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Resuming a Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0100.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"42", + "code":"44", "des":"During the migration, if a migration task fails due to uncertain causes, the background will resume the task several times. However, the task may fail to be recovered in ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"reset failed migration tasks,Resetting a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Resetting a Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0109.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0109.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"43", + "code":"45", "des":"During migration, if the flow control mode cannot meet the requirements during peak hours, you can pause the migration task.You can pause the following migration tasks:To", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Pausing a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Pausing a Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0004.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"44", + "code":"46", "des":"After the source database and services are migrated to the destination database, you can stop the migration task. To prevent data from being overwritten after the source ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"stop the migration task,Stopping a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Stopping a Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0005.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"45", + "code":"47", "des":"This section describes how to delete a migration task that has been completed or has failed. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"delete a migration task,Deleting a Migration Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Deleting a Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0001.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"46", + "code":"48", "des":"Migration statuses indicate different migration phases.Table 1 lists statuses and descriptions of online migration tasks.If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the ta", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,Task Statuses,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Statuses", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_online_tag.html", + "node_id":"drs_online_tag.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"47", + "code":"49", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Tag Management,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Tag Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0001.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"48", + "code":"50", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backup Migration", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Backup Migration", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_offline_migration.html", + "node_id":"drs_offline_migration.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"49", + "code":"51", "des":"It often becomes necessary to hide the real IP address of your database for the sake of security. Migrating data through direct connections is an option, but costly. DRS ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Migration Overview,Backup Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Migration Overview", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0010.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"50", + "code":"52", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Backup Migration.This section describes constraints on backup migrations ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"backup migrations of Microsoft SQL Server databases,Creating an RDS Backup Migration Task,Backup Mig", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Creating an RDS Backup Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0009.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0009.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"51", + "code":"53", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Backup Migration.This section describes constraints on backup migrations ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating a Backup Using OBS Buckets,Backup Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Creating a Backup Using OBS Buckets", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0007.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"52", + "code":"54", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Management", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"53", + "code":"55", "des":"The Basic Information page of a backup migration task displays information about the task, backup files, and databases. This section describes how to view details about c", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Task Details,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Viewing Task Details", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0008.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"54", + "code":"56", "des":"After a backup migration task is created, you can modify basic information about the task to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task na", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Editing Migration Task Information,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Editing Migration Task Information", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0003.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"55", + "code":"57", "des":"Migration logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the migration process. This section describes how to view migration logs to locate and ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view migration logs,Viewing Migration Logs,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Viewing Migration Logs", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0004.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"56", + "code":"58", "des":"This section describes how to delete a migration task. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution when performing this operation.You hav", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"delete a migration task,Deleting a Migration Task,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Deleting a Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0010.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"57", + "code":"59", "des":"Migration statuses indicate different migration phases.Table 1 lists statuses and descriptions of backup migration tasks.Deleted migration tasks are not displayed in the ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"statuses and descriptions of backup migration tasks,Task Statuses,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Statuses", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_backup_tag.html", + "node_id":"drs_backup_tag.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"58", + "code":"60", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Tag Management,Backup Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Tag Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"59", + "code":"61", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Synchronization", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Real-Time Synchronization", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0457.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0457.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"60", + "code":"62", "des":"DRS real-time synchronization supports multiple topology types. You can plan the topology types as required. For details, see the following content.To ensure data consist", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data Synchronization Topologies,Real-Time Synchronization,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Data Synchronization Topologies", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_06_0003.html", + "node_id":"drs_06_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"61", + "code":"63", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"To the Cloud", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"To the Cloud", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0102.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0102.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"62", + "code":"64", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to MySQL,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0104.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0104.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"63", + "code":"65", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed,To the Cloud,User Guide", - "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed", + "kw":"From MySQL to GaussDB Distributed,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB Distributed", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_1124.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1124.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"64", + "code":"66", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0107.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0107.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"65", + "code":"67", "des":"Table 2 lists the objects that can be synchronized in different scenarios. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the synchronization.To start a syn", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From PostgreSQL to PostgreSQL,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From PostgreSQL to PostgreSQL", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"drs_04_0451.html", + "uri":"drs_04_0446.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0446.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"66", + "code":"68", + "des":"When a task is being started or in the full synchronization phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.To keep data ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"From Oracle to PostgreSQL,To the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From Oracle to PostgreSQL", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_04_0451.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0451.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"69", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Out of the Cloud", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Out of the Cloud", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0117.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0117.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"67", + "code":"70", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to MySQL,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"drs_04_0121.html", + "uri":"drs_04_0118.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0118.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"68", + "code":"71", + "des":"DMS for KafkaYou have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.The s", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"From MySQL to Kafka,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From MySQL to Kafka", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_04_0121.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0121.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"72", "des":"Table 2 lists the objects that can be synchronized in different scenarios. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the synchronization.Before you sta", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"From GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed to MySQL,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", - "title":"From GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed to MySQL", + "kw":"From GaussDB Distributed to MySQL,Out of the Cloud,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From GaussDB Distributed to MySQL", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0452.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0452.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"69", + "code":"73", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Between Self-built Databases", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Between Self-built Databases", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_1118.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1118.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"70", + "code":"74", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to MySQL,Between Self-built Databases,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"drs_TaskMangement.html", + "uri":"drs_04_0128.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0128.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"71", + "code":"75", + "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.The success of dat", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"From MySQL to Kafka,Between Self-built Databases,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"From MySQL to Kafka", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_TaskMangement.html", + "node_id":"drs_taskmangement.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"76", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Management", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_06_0005.html", + "node_id":"drs_06_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"72", + "code":"77", "des":"A complete real-time synchronization consists of creating a synchronization task, tracking task progress, analyzing synchronization logs, and comparing data consistency. ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Step 1: Create a Synchronization Task,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 1: Create a Synchronization Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0007.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"73", + "code":"78", "des":"This section describes how to check the synchronization progress.During a full synchronization, DRS displays the progress overview. You can view the structure, data, and ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"synchronization,view table synchronization progress,Step 2: Query the Synchronization Progress,Task ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 2: Query the Synchronization Progress", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0008.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"74", + "code":"79", "des":"Synchronization logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the synchronization process. This section describes how to view synchronization l", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view synchronization logs,Step 3: View Synchronization Logs,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 3: View Synchronization Logs", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0012.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0012.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"75", + "code":"80", "des":"This section describes how to compare synchronization items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. To minimize the impact on serv", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"compare synchronization items,Step 4: Compare Synchronization Items,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 4: Compare Synchronization Items", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_05_0007.html", + "node_id":"drs_05_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"76", + "code":"81", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Managing Objects", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Managing Objects", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0009.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0009.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"77", + "code":"82", "des":"This section describes how to change synchronization objects in a synchronization task. After a data synchronization task is created, you can change synchronization objec", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Editing Synchronization Objects,Managing Objects,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Editing Synchronization Objects", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0015.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0015.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"78", + "code":"83", "des":"Data synchronization allows you to synchronize objects (including databases, schemas and tables) in a sources database to the corresponding objects in a destination datab", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Mapping Object Names,Managing Objects,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Mapping Object Names", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0100.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"79", + "code":"84", "des":"During real-time synchronization, the objects that can be mapped to the destination include databases, schemas, tables, and columns (in data processing). After a mapping ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Synchronization Mapping Information,Managing Objects,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Viewing Synchronization Mapping Information", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0035.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0035.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"80", + "code":"85", "des":"DRS processes synchronized objects and allows you to add rules for selected objects. The processing rules supported by each data flow type are different.In many-to-one ma", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Processing Data,Managing Objects,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Processing Data", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_05_0006.html", + "node_id":"drs_05_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"81", + "code":"86", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Life Cycle", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Life Cycle", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0003.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"82", + "code":"87", "des":"View the information about the synchronization tasks and synchronization instances. This section describes how to view details about a synchronization task you have creat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing Task Details,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Viewing Task Details", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0004.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"83", + "code":"88", "des":"After a synchronization task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying Task Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Modifying Task Information", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0016.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0016.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"84", + "code":"89", "des":"A data synchronization task may fail due to the change of the password of the source or destination database. You need to update the information and then retry the synchr", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"modify,Modifying Connection Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Modifying Connection Information", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0401.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0401.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"85", + "code":"90", "des":"You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration type", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0010.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"86", + "code":"91", "des":"For a synchronization task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the source and destination d", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"edit,Editing a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Editing a Synchronization Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0400.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0400.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"87", + "code":"92", "des":"A fault may occur during the synchronization due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space. After the fault is rectified based on the synchronization log in", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resuming a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Resuming a Synchronization Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0110.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0110.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"88", + "code":"93", "des":"DRS allows you to pause real-time synchronization tasks.The following tasks can be paused during incremental synchronization:To the cloudMySQL->MySQLPostgreSQL->PostgreSQ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Pausing a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Pausing a Synchronization Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0300.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0300.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"89", + "code":"94", "des":"During real-time synchronization, you can reset the synchronization tasks in one of the following statuses so that you do not need to configure the tasks again.PausedIncr", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resetting a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Resetting a Synchronization Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0013.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0013.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"90", + "code":"95", "des":"After the source database and services are migrated to the destination database, you can stop the synchronization task. To prevent data from being overwritten after the s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"stop the synchronization task,Stopping a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Stopping a Synchronization Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_10_0014.html", + "node_id":"drs_10_0014.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"91", + "code":"96", "des":"This section describes how to delete a synchronization task that has been completed or has failed. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise ca", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"delete a synchronization task,Deleting a Synchronization Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Deleting a Synchronization Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_06_0004.html", + "node_id":"drs_06_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"92", + "code":"97", "des":"Synchronization statuses indicate different synchronization phases.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Statuses,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Statuses", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_synchronization_tag.html", + "node_id":"drs_synchronization_tag.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"93", + "code":"98", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Tag Management,Real-Time Synchronization,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Tag Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_1113.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1113.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"94", + "code":"99", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"drs_03_1131.html", + "uri":"drs_03_0052.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0052.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"95", - "des":"This section describes how to clear the streaming replication slots of the source GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed database after the incremental or full+incremental sy", + "code":"100", + "des":"Data synchronized to the Kafka cluster is stored in JSON, and JSON-C formats.For details about the JSON format from MySQL to Kafka, see Table 1. Parameters for synchroniz", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "kw":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed,Operation Reference in Synch", - "title":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed", + "kw":"Kafka Message Format,Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Kafka Message Format", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_05_0018.html", + "node_id":"drs_05_0018.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"101", + "des":"No security authentication mode is available. You only need to enter the IP address and port for connection.The SASL mechanism is used to connect to Kafka, and you need t", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Kafka Authentication,Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Kafka Authentication", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_03_1131.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1131.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"102", + "des":"This section describes how to clear the streaming replication slots of the source GaussDB distributed database after the incremental or full+incremental synchronization t", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of GaussDB Distributed,Operation Reference in Synchronization Scen", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of GaussDB Distributed", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_12_0009.html", + "node_id":"drs_12_0009.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"96", + "code":"103", "des":"This section describes how to clear the logical replication slot of the source database, how to synchronize sequence values, and how to reset the sequence values in the d", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of PostgreSQL,Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios,Use", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of PostgreSQL", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0088.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0088.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"97", + "code":"104", "des":"This section describes how to perform real-time synchronization from PostgreSQL to RDS PostgreSQL. You can create triggers and functions in the source database to obtain ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Creating Triggers and Functions to Implement Incremental DDL Synchronization for PostgreSQL,Operatio", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Creating Triggers and Functions to Implement Incremental DDL Synchronization for PostgreSQL", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0023.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0023.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"98", + "code":"105", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0024.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0024.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"99", + "code":"106", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DR Scenarios", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"DR Scenarios", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0122.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0122.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"100", + "code":"107", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to MySQL,DR Scenarios,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0123.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0123.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"101", + "code":"108", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby,DR Scenarios,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0125.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0125.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"102", + "code":"109", "des":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"From Cassandra to Cassandra,DR Scenarios,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"From Cassandra to Cassandra", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_07_0007.html", + "node_id":"drs_07_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"103", + "code":"110", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Management", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0027.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0027.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"104", + "code":"111", "des":"To prevent service unavailability caused by regional faults, DRS provides disaster recovery to ensure service continuity. If the region where the primary instance is loca", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DR instance,Step 1: Create a DR Task,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 1: Create a DR Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0028.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0028.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"105", + "code":"112", "des":"After a DR task starts, you can check the DR progress.You have logged in to the DRS console.A DR task has been created and started.On the Disaster Recovery Progress tab, ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view the DR progress,Step 2: Query the DR Progress,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 2: Query the DR Progress", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0029.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0029.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"106", + "code":"113", "des":"DR logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the DR process. This section describes how to view DR logs to locate and analyze database prob", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"view DR logs,Step 3: View DR Logs,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 3: View DR Logs", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0033.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0033.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"107", + "code":"114", "des":"DR item comparison: You can compare DR items to check data consistency between the service database and DR database. Currently, you can compare the following items during", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Step 4: Compare DR Items,Task Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Step 4: Compare DR Items", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_07_0008.html", + "node_id":"drs_07_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"108", + "code":"115", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Task Life Cycle", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Life Cycle", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_1134.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1134.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"109", + "code":"116", "des":"After a DR task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask start timeYo", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Editing Subscription Task Information,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Editing Subscription Task Information", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0047.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0047.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"110", + "code":"117", "des":"DRS allows you to change the flow control mode for a task. Currently, only the following DR tasks support this function.MySQL->MySQLMySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/st", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0026.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0026.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"111", + "code":"118", "des":"For a DR task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the source and destination database detai", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"edit,Editing a DR Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Editing a DR Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0027.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0027.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"112", + "code":"119", "des":"A fault may occur during DR due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space.If a DR task fails due to non-network problems, the system will automatically resu", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Resuming a DR Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Resuming a DR Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0024.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0024.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"113", + "code":"120", "des":"DRS monitors the DB instance performance and the migration progress. With the monitoring information, you can determine the data flow health status, data integrity, and d", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Viewing DR Metrics,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Viewing DR Metrics", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_1116.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1116.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"114", + "code":"121", "des":"DRS supports primary/standby switchover for DR tasks. If both RPO and RTO are 0, data has been completely migrated to the DR database. Then, you can determine whether to ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Performing a Primary/Standby Switchover for DR Tasks,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Performing a Primary/Standby Switchover for DR Tasks", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0029.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0029.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"115", + "code":"122", "des":"When the DR task is complete or no longer needed, you can stop the DR task. You can stop a task in any of the following statuses:CreatingConfigurationInitializingDisaster", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"stop the DR task,Stopping a DR Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Stopping a DR Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_0030.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_0030.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"116", + "code":"123", "des":"You can delete a DR task, when it is no longer needed Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution when performing this operation.You have", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"delete a DR task,Deleting a DR Task,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Deleting a DR Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0025.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0025.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"117", + "code":"124", "des":"DR statuses indicate different DR phases.Table 1 lists DR task statuses and descriptions.If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. Af", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DR task statuses,Task Statuses,Task Life Cycle,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Task Statuses", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_disaster_tag.html", + "node_id":"drs_disaster_tag.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"118", + "code":"125", "des":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Tag Management Service (TMS),Tag Management,Real-Time Disaster Recovery,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Tag Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0099.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0099.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"119", + "code":"126", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"FAQs", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"FAQs", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0103.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0103.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"120", + "code":"127", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Product Consulting", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Product Consulting", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0103.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0103.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"121", + "code":"128", "des":"A region and availability zone (AZ) identify the location of a data center. You can create resources in a specific region and AZ.A region is a physical data center. Each ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are Regions and AZs?,Product Consulting,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Are Regions and AZs?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0100.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"122", + "code":"129", "des":"DRS is a stable, efficient, and easy-to-use cloud service for database migration and synchronization in real time.It simplifies data migration processes and reduces migra", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DRS,What Is DRS?,Product Consulting,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Is DRS?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0105.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0105.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"123", + "code":"130", "des":"Yes. DRS provides high availability and can migrate a single RDS instance or RDS primary/standby instances. DRS can automatically rebuild the databases connection after a", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migrate a single RDS instance or RDS primary/standby instances,Can DRS Migrate RDS Primary/Standby I", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Can DRS Migrate RDS Primary/Standby Instances?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0031.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0031.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"124", + "code":"131", "des":"In database migration scenarios, if a migration task fails due to unavoidable problems (such as network fluctuation), DRS records the current parsing and replay point (wh", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Does DRS Support Resumable Uploads?,Product Consulting,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Does DRS Support Resumable Uploads?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0087.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0087.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"125", + "code":"132", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are the Differences Between Real-Time Migration, Real-Time DR, and Real-Time Synchronization?,P", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Are the Differences Between Real-Time Migration, Real-Time DR, and Real-Time Synchronization?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1133.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1133.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"126", + "code":"133", "des":"In the full migration phase, DRS uses the row-level parallel migration mode to ensure migration performance and transmission stability. If the source database data is com", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Solve the Table Bloat Issue?,Product Consulting,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Solve the Table Bloat Issue?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1142.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1142.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"127", + "code":"134", "des":"RDS read replicas cannot be selected on the DRS console. You can select Self-built on ECS and enter the read replica IP address and port number to connect to the instance", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Cannot I Select RDS Read Replicas on the DRS Console?,Product Consulting,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Why Cannot I Select RDS Read Replicas on the DRS Console?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1145.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1145.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"128", + "code":"135", "des":"During the initialization of a full migration or synchronization task, DRS needs to query all inventory data in the source database. DRS uses simple SQL statements to que", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Does DRS Affect the Source and Destination Databases?,Product Consulting,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Does DRS Affect the Source and Destination Databases?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0108.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0108.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"129", + "code":"136", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Network and Security", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Network and Security", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0109.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0109.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"130", + "code":"137", "des":"Uses security groups to ensure that the sources of access are trusted.Uses SSL channels to encrypt data during transmission.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Security Protection Policies Does DRS Have?,Network and Security,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Security Protection Policies Does DRS Have?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0110.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0110.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"131", + "code":"138", "des":"If the network is disconnected during the migration, you can view the task status first. If a full or incremental task fails, click Resume in the Operation column.Full mi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do If the Network Is Disconnected During the Migration?,Network and Security,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Can I Do If the Network Is Disconnected During the Migration?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0112.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0112.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"132", + "code":"139", "des":"By default, a VPC on the current cloud is isolated from external networks for security reasons. You cannot use an EIP outside a VPC (for example, an EIP of another cloud ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Configure a VPC Security Group to Allow Traffic from an EIP?,Network and Security,User Gui", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Can I Configure a VPC Security Group to Allow Traffic from an EIP?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0100.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"133", + "code":"140", "des":"Before data migration, ensure that network preparations and security rule settings are complete. If the connection is abnormal, check whether the network configuration is", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do If the Network Connection Between the Replication Instance and Database Is Abnormal?,N", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Can I Do If the Network Connection Between the Replication Instance and Database Is Abnormal?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0040.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0040.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"134", + "code":"141", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Permissions Management", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Permissions Management", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0034.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0034.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"135", + "code":"142", "des":"DRS has certain permission requirements on accounts during migration, synchronization, and DR. This section describes the permission requirements on the MySQL engine.You ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Which MySQL Permissions Are Required for DRS?,Permissions Management,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Which MySQL Permissions Are Required for DRS?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_12_0001.html", + "node_id":"drs_12_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"136", + "code":"143", "des":"mysql -h 'host' -u 'user' -p-N $@ -e \"SELECT CONCAT('SHOW GRANTS FOR ''', user, '''@''', host, ''';') AS query FROM mysql.user\" > /tmp/users.sqlhost indicates the IP add", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Import Users and Permissions from the Source to the Destination Database?,Permissions Mana", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Can I Import Users and Permissions from the Source to the Destination Database?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0025.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0025.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"137", + "code":"144", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Migration", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Real-Time Migration", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0104.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0104.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"138", + "code":"145", "des":"You can refer to the following methods to check whether the task can be stopped. Before stopping the task, ensure that:At least one complete data comparison is performed ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"When Can I Stop a Migration Task?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"When Can I Stop a Migration Task?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0003.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"139", + "code":"146", "des":"Definer is used in views, stored procedures, triggers, and events. Definer does not restrict the permission to invoke objects, instead the permission to access the databa", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Maintain the Original Service User Permission System After Definer Is Forcibly Converted Du", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Maintain the Original Service User Permission System After Definer Is Forcibly Converted During MySQL Migration?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0121.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0121.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"140", + "code":"147", "des":"After the MySQL stored procedure is migrated to the cloud, an error may occur when the stored procedure or function is invoked due to permission problems.The method varie", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do If the Invoking Permission Problem Occurs After the MySQL Stored Procedure Is Migrated", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Can I Do If the Invoking Permission Problem Occurs After the MySQL Stored Procedure Is Migrated to the Cloud?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0020.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0020.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"141", + "code":"148", "des":"To ensure that all services on the database are stopped, perform the following steps:", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Ensure that All Services on the Database Are Stopped?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Ensure that All Services on the Database Are Stopped?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0123.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0123.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"142", + "code":"149", "des":"When you use a subaccount to use scheduled task startup function, the account entrustment function must be used. Otherwise, the scheduled task fails to be started, leavin", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Security Administrator,What Can I Do When Scheduled Task Failed to Start Leaving Message \"can not ge", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Can I Do When Scheduled Task Failed to Start Leaving Message \"can not get agency token\"", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0032.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0032.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"143", + "code":"150", "des":"Currently, RDS for MySQL does not support the MyISAM engine due to the following reasons.MyISAM engine tables do not support transactions and support only table-level loc", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do If MyISAM Tables Are Not Supported by RDS for MySQL?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Can I Do If MyISAM Tables Are Not Supported by RDS for MySQL?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0030.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0030.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"144", + "code":"151", "des":"Based on MySQL 5.7, some new features have been added to MySQL 8.0. There are performance differences between the two versions. Before migration, you need to analyze comp", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are the Precautions for Migrating Data from an Earlier Version MySQL to MySQL 8.0?,Real-Time Mi", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Are the Precautions for Migrating Data from an Earlier Version MySQL to MySQL 8.0?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_15_0100.html", + "node_id":"drs_15_0100.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"145", + "code":"152", "des":"Out of memory (OOM) occurs during the migration of MongoDB databases, causing migration failures.The possible causes are as follows:If the mongod service of the source da", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do When OOM Occurs During the Migration of MongoDB Databases?,Real-Time Migration,User Gu", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Can I Do When OOM Occurs During the Migration of MongoDB Databases?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0001.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"146", + "code":"153", "des":"Before using the DRS service to migrate collections between sharded clusters, you must disable the balancer of the collections to be migrated.After the migration is compl", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Disable the Balancer?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Disable the Balancer?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_14_0006.html", + "node_id":"drs_14_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"147", + "code":"154", "des":"During the MySQL to MySQL migration, if the migration log indicates that the migration of events and triggers fails after the migration task is complete, you can manually", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Export and Import Events and Triggers in Batches?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Export and Import Events and Triggers in Batches?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_14_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_14_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"148", + "code":"155", "des":"When the value of source database parameter lower_case_table_names is set to 1, the databases or tables whose names contain uppercase letters cannot be migrated.When the ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Can I Migrate Databases or Tables Whose Names Contain Uppercase Letters?,Real-Time Migration,Use", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Can I Migrate Databases or Tables Whose Names Contain Uppercase Letters?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_09_0101.html", + "node_id":"drs_09_0101.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"149", + "code":"156", "des":"In a sharded cluster, orphaned documents are those documents on a shard that also exist in chunks on other shards as a result of failed migrations or incomplete migration", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Delete Orphaned Documents in MongoDB Sharded Clusters?,Real-Time Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Delete Orphaned Documents in MongoDB Sharded Clusters?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0457.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0457.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"150", + "code":"157", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Backup Migration", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Backup Migration", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0041.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0041.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"151", + "code":"158", "des":"During the backup migration, If Last Backup File is selected by mistake, perform either of the following operations:If you select Yes by mistake, the database receives a ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Should I Do If the Last Backup File Is Incorrectly Selected in the Backup Migration Scenario?,B", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Should I Do If the Last Backup File Is Incorrectly Selected in the Backup Migration Scenario?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0458.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0458.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"152", + "code":"159", "des":"After data is migrated from the local host or VMs to the RDS SQL Server DB instance on the current cloud through DRS, the Login accounts, DBLink, AgentJobs, and key confi", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Manual Configuration,Backup Migration,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Manual Configuration", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0026.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0026.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"153", + "code":"160", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Synchronization", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Real-Time Synchronization", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0101.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0101.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"154", + "code":"161", "des":"DRS can directly synchronize tables of different schemas to those of the same schema if the tables do not conflict with each other.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can DRS Sync Tables of Different Schemas to the Same Schema?,Real-Time Synchronization,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Can DRS Sync Tables of Different Schemas to the Same Schema?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1124.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1124.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"155", + "code":"162", "des":"During table-level incremental synchronization from MySQL to MySQL, you can use Online DDL tools to add or delete columns. Pay attention to the following when using Onlin", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can Online DDL Tools Be Used for Real-time Synchronization?,Real-Time Synchronization,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Can Online DDL Tools Be Used for Real-time Synchronization?", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"drs_04_0028.html", + "uri":"drs_16_1151.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1151.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"156", + "code":"163", + "des":"If the source Oracle database is an RAC cluster, you are advised to use SCAN IP+SERVICE_NAMES to create a task because SCAN IP has stronger fault tolerance, better load b", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Why Do I Use the SCAN IP Address to Connect to an Oracle RAC Cluster?,Real-Time Synchronization,User", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Why Do I Use the SCAN IP Address to Connect to an Oracle RAC Cluster?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_16_1155.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1155.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"164", + "des":"In physical standby mode, the Oracle database directly replicates logs from the primary database and does not generate any logs. If the source is an Oracle database, you ", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"How Do I Check Supplemental Logging of the Source Oracle Database?,Real-Time Synchronization,User Gu", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"How Do I Check Supplemental Logging of the Source Oracle Database?", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_04_0028.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0028.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"165", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0033.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0033.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"157", + "code":"166", "des":"Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the difference between the time when a transaction in the current service database is submitted and the time when the transaction", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are RPO and RTO of DRS Disaster Recovery?,Real-Time Disaster Recovery,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Are RPO and RTO of DRS Disaster Recovery?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1125.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1125.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"158", + "code":"167", "des":"For real-time DR tasks, if the service database is faulty, manually perform a primary/standby switchover. For details, see Performing a Primary/Standby Switchover for DR ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Is a Primary/Standby Switchover Triggered Automatically or Manually for DR Tasks?,Real-Time Disaster", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Is a Primary/Standby Switchover Triggered Automatically or Manually for DR Tasks?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1126.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1126.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"159", + "code":"168", "des":"Real-time DR is performed by instance. You cannot select a specified database, but you can select tables or databases for real-time migration and synchronization task.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can Real-Time DR Be Performed for Specified Databases?,Real-Time Disaster Recovery,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Can Real-Time DR Be Performed for Specified Databases?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_14_0001.html", + "node_id":"drs_14_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"160", + "code":"169", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Data-Level Comparison", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Data-Level Comparison", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1130.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1130.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"161", + "code":"170", "des":"DRS's data comparison allows you to check whether the data in the source database is the same as that in the destination database.DRS does not support value comparison fo", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Which of the Following Data Types Are Not Supported By Value Comparison?,Data-Level Comparison,User ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Which of the Following Data Types Are Not Supported By Value Comparison?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1161.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1161.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"162", + "code":"171", "des":"Object comparison: System tables of the source and destination databases are queried, occupying about 10 sessions. The database is not affected. However, if there are a l", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Impact Does a DRS Comparison Task Have on Databases?,Data-Level Comparison,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Impact Does a DRS Comparison Task Have on Databases?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1162.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1162.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"163", + "code":"172", "des":"Object comparison: Generally, the comparison results are returned within several minutes based on the query performance of the source database. If the amount of data is l", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Long Does a DRS Comparison Task Take?,Data-Level Comparison,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Long Does a DRS Comparison Task Take?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0029.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0029.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"164", + "code":"173", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"General Operations", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"General Operations", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_15_0120.html", + "node_id":"drs_15_0120.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"165", + "code":"174", "des":"Information often overlaps when you decrease the size of the page. You are advised to set the page scale at 100%.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Can I Do When Information Overlaps on the DRS Console?,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Can I Do When Information Overlaps on the DRS Console?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_04_0021.html", + "node_id":"drs_04_0021.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"166", + "code":"175", "des":"During the migration, the destination instance can be set to read-only or read/write.Read-only: During the migration, the destination instance is read-only. After the mig", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Is the Destination Instance Set to Read-only or Read/Write?,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Is the Destination Instance Set to Read-only or Read/Write?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"167", + "code":"176", "des":"During migration for MySQL databases, the source database binlog must be in the ROW format. Otherwise, the task fails. After binlog_format=ROW at the global level is set ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Set Global binlog_format=ROW to Take Effect Immediately?,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Set Global binlog_format=ROW to Take Effect Immediately?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0010.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"168", + "code":"177", "des":"When migrating MySQL databases, ensure that the binlog_row_image parameter of the source database is set to FULL. Otherwise, the migration task will fail. After binlog_ro", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Set binlog_row_image=FULL to Take Effect Immediately?,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Set binlog_row_image=FULL to Take Effect Immediately?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_14_0004.html", + "node_id":"drs_14_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"169", + "code":"178", "des":"When you set the password for the migration account in the destination database, you need to set the password based on the password strength requirements of the destinati", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Change the Destination Database Password to Meet the Password Policy?,General Operations,Us", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Change the Destination Database Password to Meet the Password Policy?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_14_0003.html", + "node_id":"drs_14_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"170", + "code":"179", "des":"MongoDB shards data at the collection level, distributing the collection data using shard keys.You choose the shard key when sharding a collection. Each record contains a", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"How Do I Configure the Shard Key for a MongoDB Sharded Cluster?,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"How Do I Configure the Shard Key for a MongoDB Sharded Cluster?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0102.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0102.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"171", + "code":"180", "des":"When the cloud connection bandwidth is expanded, the bandwidth link needs to be re-established and the network is disconnected. Whether the network disconnection affects ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Does Bandwidth Expansion Affect the Running DRS Tasks?,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Does Bandwidth Expansion Affect the Running DRS Tasks?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0122.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0122.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"172", + "code":"181", "des":"In some MariaDB versions, the SysDB database is used as a system database (similar to the sys database of MySQL 5.7). Therefore, DRS considers the SysDB database as the s", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Data in MariaDB and SysDB Cannot Be Migrated?,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Why Data in MariaDB and SysDB Cannot Be Migrated?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_0120.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_0120.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"173", + "code":"182", "des":"DRS supports many-to-one scenarios during migration of different types of instances and tables to suit your service requirements.To ensure that there is sufficient space ", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Constraints and Operation Suggestions on Many-to-One Scenario,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Constraints and Operation Suggestions on Many-to-One Scenario", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_01_0101.html", + "node_id":"drs_01_0101.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"174", + "code":"183", "des":"You can view DRS operation logs on the Cloud Trace Service (CTS) console.Click the username in the upper right corner and select Operation Log from the drop-down list.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"DRS,Where Can I View DRS Operation Logs?,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Where Can I View DRS Operation Logs?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1140.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1140.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"175", + "code":"184", "des":"No. DRS cannot restart a completed task.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Can a Completed Task Be Restarted?,General Operations,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Can a Completed Task Be Restarted?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1143.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1143.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"176", + "code":"185", "des":"You can reset a task when the task is suspended or fails. Resetting a task does not clear the destination database. You can determine whether to clear the destination dat", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"What Are the Differences Between Resetting a Task and Recreating a Task?,General Operations,User Gui", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"What Are the Differences Between Resetting a Task and Recreating a Task?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1156.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1156.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"177", + "code":"186", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Delay", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Delay", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1148.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1148.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"178", + "code":"187", "des":"Recovery Time Objective (RTO) is duration of time within which transactions on the DRS instance are transmitted and replayed to the destination database during incrementa", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Does the Delay of DR Tasks Increase?,Delay,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Why Does the Delay of DR Tasks Increase?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_16_1157.html", + "node_id":"drs_16_1157.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"179", + "code":"188", "des":"Migration from MongoDB to DDSMigration from DDS to MongoDBTo ensure the performance of migration, synchronization, or disaster recovery, DRS performs concurrent replay at", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Why Is the Delay High In MongoDB Replication Scenarios?,Delay,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Why Is the Delay High In MongoDB Replication Scenarios?", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_13_0001.html", + "node_id":"drs_13_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"180", + "code":"189", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Troubleshooting", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Troubleshooting", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0001.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0001.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"181", + "code":"190", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Solutions to Failed Check Items", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Solutions to Failed Check Items", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_12_0005.html", + "node_id":"drs_12_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"182", + "code":"191", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Disk Space", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Disk Space", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0010.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0010.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"183", + "code":"192", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has Sufficient Storage Space,Disk Space,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has Sufficient Storage Space", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0076.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0076.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"184", + "code":"193", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Server Has Sufficient Storage Space,Disk Space,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Server Has Sufficient Storage Space", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_12_0008.html", + "node_id":"drs_12_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"185", + "code":"194", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Parameters", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Database Parameters", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0014.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0014.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"186", + "code":"195", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"source database binlog,Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Enabled,Database Parameters,Us", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Enabled", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0015.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0015.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"187", + "code":"196", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"source database binlog,Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Row-Based,Database Parameters,", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Row-Based", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0016.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0016.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"188", + "code":"197", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"binlog retention period,Checking Whether the Binlog Retention Period Is Set on the Source Database,D", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Binlog Retention Period Is Set on the Source Database", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0013.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0013.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"189", + "code":"198", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Character Sets Are Consistent,Database Paramete", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Character Sets Are Consistent", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0018.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0018.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"190", + "code":"199", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database server_id Meets the Incremental Migration Requirements,Database", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database server_id Meets the Incremental Migration Requirements", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0019.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0019.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"191", + "code":"200", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"case sensitivity,Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Table Names Are Consistent in ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Table Names Are Consistent in Case Sensitivity", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0022.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0022.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"192", + "code":"201", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Object Names with Non-ASCII Characters,Database Parame", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Object Names with Non-ASCII Characters", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0023.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0023.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"193", + "code":"202", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the TIME_ZONE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Database ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the TIME_ZONE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0024.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0024.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"194", + "code":"203", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the COLLATION_SERVER Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Da", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the COLLATION_SERVER Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0025.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0025.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"195", + "code":"204", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SERVER_UUID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Databas", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the SERVER_UUID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0044.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0044.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"196", + "code":"205", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SERVER_ID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are Different,Database", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the SERVER_ID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are Different", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0049.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0049.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"197", + "code":"206", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Invalid sql_mode Values,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Invalid sql_mode Values", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0059.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0059.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"198", + "code":"207", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SQL_MODE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Database P", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the SQL_MODE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0228.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0228.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"199", + "code":"208", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the sql_mode Value in the Destination Database Is Not NO_ENGINE_SUBSTITUTION,Databa", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the sql_mode Value in the Destination Database Is Not NO_ENGINE_SUBSTITUTION", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0060.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0060.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"200", + "code":"209", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the innodb_strict_mode Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the innodb_strict_mode Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0053.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0053.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"201", + "code":"210", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the max_wal_senders Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured,Database P", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the max_wal_senders Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0054.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0054.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"202", + "code":"211", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the WAL_LEVEL Value in the Source Database Is Correct,Database Parameters,User Guid", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the WAL_LEVEL Value in the Source Database Is Correct", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0055.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0055.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"203", + "code":"212", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the MAX_REPLICATION_SLOTS Value in the Source Database Is Correct,Database Paramete", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the MAX_REPLICATION_SLOTS Value in the Source Database Is Correct", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0056.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0056.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"204", + "code":"213", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is on Standby,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is on Standby", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0061.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0061.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"205", + "code":"214", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the log_slave_updates Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured,Database", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the log_slave_updates Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0063.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0063.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"206", + "code":"215", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the BLOCK_SIZE Value of the Source Database Is the Same as That of the Destination ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the BLOCK_SIZE Value of the Source Database Is the Same as That of the Destination Database", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0064.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0064.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"207", + "code":"216", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the binlog_row_image Value is FULL,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the binlog_row_image Value is FULL", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0453.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0453.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"208", + "code":"217", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Transaction Isolation Levels are Consistent,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Transaction Isolation Levels are Consistent", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0038.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0038.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"209", + "code":"218", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the lc_monetary Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Databas", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the lc_monetary Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0073.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0073.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"210", + "code":"219", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Trigger Names with Non-ASCII Characters,Database Param", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Trigger Names with Non-ASCII Characters", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0200.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0200.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"211", + "code":"220", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Collections Contain More Than 10 Indexes,Database Parameters,Us", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Collections Contain More Than 10 Indexes", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0227.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0227.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"212", + "code":"221", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in Both the Source and Destination Dat", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in Both the Source and Destination Databases", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0225.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0225.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"213", + "code":"222", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in the Destination Database,Database P", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in the Destination Database", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_15_0017.html", + "node_id":"drs_15_0017.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"214", + "code":"223", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the max_allowed_packet Value of the Destination Database Is too Small,Database Para", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the max_allowed_packet Value of the Destination Database Is too Small", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"drs_03_045.html", + "uri":"drs_03_043.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_043.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"215", + "code":"224", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Character Set Is Supported,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Character Set Is Supported", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_03_045.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_045.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"225", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Databases and Tables Exist,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Databases and Tables Exist", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_03_1130.html", + "node_id":"drs_03_1130.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"216", + "code":"226", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether session_replication_role of the Destination Database Is correctly Set,Database Para", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether session_replication_role of the Destination Database Is correctly Set", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0066.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0066.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"217", + "code":"227", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the MongoDB Instance Type Matches the Migration Mode,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the MongoDB Instance Type Matches the Migration Mode", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"drs_11_0469.html", + "uri":"drs_11_0465.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0465.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"218", + "code":"228", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Checking the Physical Standby Database,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Checking the Physical Standby Database", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_11_0469.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0469.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"229", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Values of group_concat_max_len Are Consistent,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Values of group_concat_max_len Are Consistent", "githuburl":"" }, { - "uri":"drs_11_0482.html", + "uri":"drs_11_0471.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0471.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"219", + "code":"230", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Checking Whether the Character Sets Are Compatible,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Checking Whether the Character Sets Are Compatible", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_11_0481.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0481.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"231", + "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Unsupported Table Field Types,Database Parameters,User", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], + "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Unsupported Table Field Types", + "githuburl":"" + }, + { + "uri":"drs_11_0482.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0482.xml", + "product_code":"drs", + "code":"232", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Replication Attribute of Primary Key Columns,Database Parameters,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Replication Attribute of Primary Key Columns", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0464.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0464.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"220", + "code":"233", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Source DB Instance Statuses", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Source DB Instance Statuses", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0046.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0046.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"221", + "code":"234", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Databases Are of the Same Type,Source DB Instance Status", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Databases Are of the Same Type", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0463.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0463.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"222", + "code":"235", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the ChangeStream API of the source DB instance is available,Source DB Instance Stat", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the ChangeStream API of the source DB instance is available", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_12_0006.html", + "node_id":"drs_12_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"223", + "code":"236", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Destination DB Instance Statuses", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Destination DB Instance Statuses", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0011.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0011.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"224", + "code":"237", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Involved in Another Migration Task,Destination DB Insta", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Involved in Another Migration Task", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0050.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0050.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"225", + "code":"238", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has a Read Replica,Destination DB Instance Statuses,User G", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has a Read Replica", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0041.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0041.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"226", + "code":"239", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Extensions Are Supported,Destination DB Instance Statuses,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Extensions Are Supported", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0075.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0075.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"227", + "code":"240", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether Destination Contains the Configured Database,Destination DB Instance Statuses,User ", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether Destination Contains the Configured Database", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0230.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0230.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"228", + "code":"241", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination DB Instance Is Available,Destination DB Instance Statuses,User Guid", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination DB Instance Is Available", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_12_0007.html", + "node_id":"drs_12_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"229", + "code":"242", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database User Permissions", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Database User Permissions", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0009.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0009.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"230", + "code":"243", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"source database user,Checking Whether the Source Database User Has Sufficient Permissions,Database U", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database User Has Sufficient Permissions", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0008.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0008.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"231", + "code":"244", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"destination database user,Checking Whether the Destination Database User Has Sufficient Permissions,", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database User Has Sufficient Permissions", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_12_0004.html", + "node_id":"drs_12_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"232", + "code":"245", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Versions", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Database Versions", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0005.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"233", + "code":"246", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"source database version,Checking Whether the Source Database Version Is Supported,Database Versions,", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Version Is Supported", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0006.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0006.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"234", + "code":"247", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"destination database version,Checking Whether the Destination Database Version Is Supported,Database", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Version Is Supported", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0007.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0007.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"235", + "code":"248", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Migration Is from an Earlier Database Version to the Same or a Later Version,Da", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Migration Is from an Earlier Database Version to the Same or a Later Version", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_12_0003.html", + "node_id":"drs_12_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"236", + "code":"249", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Networks", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Networks", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_precheck.html", + "node_id":"drs_precheck.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"237", + "code":"250", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is Connected,Networks,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is Connected", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"238", + "code":"251", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Connected,Networks,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Connected", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0003.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0003.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"239", + "code":"252", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Can Connect to the Source Database,Networks,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Can Connect to the Source Database", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0067.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0067.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"240", + "code":"253", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Objects", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Database Objects", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0048.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0048.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"241", + "code":"254", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains a MyISAM Table,Database Objects,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains a MyISAM Table", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0080.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0080.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"242", + "code":"255", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains the Functions or Stored Procedures that the Source Dat", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains the Functions or Stored Procedures that the Source Database User Is Not Authorized to Migrate", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0117.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0117.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"243", + "code":"256", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Use Storage Engines Not Supported by the Destination Dat", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Use Storage Engines Not Supported by the Destination Database", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_15_0020.html", + "node_id":"drs_15_0020.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"244", + "code":"257", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Contain Primary Keys,Database Objects,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Contain Primary Keys", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_15_0021.html", + "node_id":"drs_15_0021.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"245", + "code":"258", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Triggers or Events,Database Objects,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Triggers or Events", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0068.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0068.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"246", + "code":"259", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Database Configuration Items", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Database Configuration Items", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0045.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0045.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"247", + "code":"260", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Name Is Valid,Database Configuration Items,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Name Is Valid", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0105.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0105.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"248", + "code":"261", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database Table Name Is Valid,Database Configuration Items,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Table Name Is Valid", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0072.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0072.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"249", + "code":"262", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Source Database View Name Is Valid,Database Configuration Items,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database View Name Is Valid", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0069.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0069.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"250", + "code":"263", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Shard Key Can Be Obtained from the Source Database,Database Configuration Items", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Shard Key Can Be Obtained from the Source Database", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0070.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0070.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"251", + "code":"264", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Conflicts", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Conflicts", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0004.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0004.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"252", + "code":"265", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the Names of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same,Conflicts,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Names of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0043.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0043.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"253", + "code":"266", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"non-empty collection with the same name as the source database,Checking Whether the Destination Data", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Contains a Non-Empty Collection with the Same Name As the Source Database", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0071.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0071.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"254", + "code":"267", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL Connections", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"SSL Connections", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0017.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0017.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"255", + "code":"268", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Correctly Configured,SSL Connections,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Correctly Configured", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0042.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0042.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"256", + "code":"269", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"SSL connection,Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Enabled for the Source Database,SSL Connection", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Enabled for the Source Database", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0107.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0107.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"257", + "code":"270", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether the SSL Certificate of the Destination Database Exists,SSL Connections,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether the SSL Certificate of the Destination Database Exists", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0220.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0220.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"258", + "code":"271", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Object Dependencies", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Object Dependencies", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_11_0222.html", + "node_id":"drs_11_0222.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"259", + "code":"272", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Checking Whether Referenced Tables Are Selected for Migration,Object Dependencies,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Checking Whether Referenced Tables Are Selected for Migration", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_02_0488.html", + "node_id":"drs_02_0488.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"260", + "code":"273", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Failure Cases", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Failure Cases", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_13_0002.html", + "node_id":"drs_13_0002.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"261", + "code":"274", "des":"When you migrate full backups from self-built OBS buckets to clouds, the following error message is displayed: restore:null.The possible causes are as follows:Backup file", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"migration,Backup Migration Failed Because Backup Files Cannot Be Found,Failure Cases,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Backup Migration Failed Because Backup Files Cannot Be Found", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_13_0005.html", + "node_id":"drs_13_0005.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"262", + "code":"275", "des":"When you migrate full backups from self-built OBS buckets to clouds, the system displays an error message indicating that the migration failed because the source database", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"the source database cannot be found in the backup files,Backup Migration Failed Because a Backup Dat", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Backup Migration Failed Because a Backup Database Cannot Be Found in the Backup Files", "githuburl":"" }, { "uri":"drs_change_history.html", + "node_id":"drs_change_history.xml", "product_code":"drs", - "code":"263", + "code":"276", "des":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "doc_type":"usermanual", "kw":"Change History,User Guide", + "search_title":"", + "metedata":[ + { + "prodname":"drs", + "documenttype":"usermanual", + "IsBot":"Yes", + "IsMulti":"Yes", + "opensource":"true" + } + ], "title":"Change History", "githuburl":"" } diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json b/docs/drs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json index 8a9d4b2d..da5fb463 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json +++ b/docs/drs/umn/CLASS.TXT.json @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ { "desc":"DATE values supported by MySQL range from '1000-01-01' to '9999-12-31'.DATETIME values supported by MySQL range from '1000-01-01 00:00:00' to '9999-12-31 23:59:59'.TIMEST", "product_code":"drs", - "title":"MySQL->GaussDB(for openGauss)", + "title":"MySQL->GaussDB", "uri":"drs_01_0326.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"9", @@ -92,12 +92,21 @@ { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", "product_code":"drs", - "title":"GaussDB(for openGauss)->MySQL", - "uri":"drs_01_0337.html", + "title":"Oracle->PostgreSQL", + "uri":"drs_01_0334.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"9", "code":"11" }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"GaussDB->MySQL", + "uri":"drs_01_0337.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"9", + "code":"12" + }, { "desc":"VPC-based migration refers to a real-time migration that the source and destination databases are in the same VPC or two VPCs that can communicate with each other. No add", "product_code":"drs", @@ -105,7 +114,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"12" + "code":"13" }, { "desc":"You can encrypt data and database connections and increase database account security.Before saving sensitive information and private data in a database, encrypt data to r", @@ -114,7 +123,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"13" + "code":"14" }, { "desc":"To begin using DRS, register an account on the official website. When the registration is successful, you can access all cloud services, including DRS and RDS.If you have", @@ -123,7 +132,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"14" + "code":"15" }, { "desc":"To improve your experience with DRS, add the Security Administrator permission using IAM in case some functions become unavailable, such as scheduled task startup, automa", @@ -132,7 +141,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0200.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"15" + "code":"16" }, { "desc":"You understand and agree that your use of this service complies with laws and regulations, including but not limited to legal compliance requirements on data content, dat", @@ -141,7 +150,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0318.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"16" + "code":"17" }, { "desc":"DRS can migrate data from your databases to the RDS databases in the cloud. For more information about RDS, see Relational Database Service User Guide.Supported network t", @@ -150,7 +159,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"1", - "code":"17" + "code":"18" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -159,7 +168,7 @@ "uri":"drs_02_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"18" + "code":"19" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -167,8 +176,8 @@ "title":"To the Cloud", "uri":"drs_online_migration.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"18", - "code":"19" + "p_code":"19", + "code":"20" }, { "desc":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", @@ -176,8 +185,17 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0088.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"19", - "code":"20" + "p_code":"20", + "code":"21" + }, + { + "desc":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby", + "uri":"drs_04_0090.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"20", + "code":"22" }, { "desc":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", @@ -185,8 +203,8 @@ "title":"From MongoDB to DDS", "uri":"drs_04_0095.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"19", - "code":"21" + "p_code":"20", + "code":"23" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -194,8 +212,8 @@ "title":"Out of the Cloud", "uri":"drs_02_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"18", - "code":"22" + "p_code":"19", + "code":"24" }, { "desc":"To start a migration task, the source and destination database users must have permissions listed in the following table. Different types of migration tasks require diffe", @@ -203,8 +221,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"22", - "code":"23" + "p_code":"24", + "code":"25" }, { "desc":"Different types of migration tasks support different migration objects. For details, see Table 2. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the migrati", @@ -212,8 +230,8 @@ "title":"From DDS to MongoDB", "uri":"drs_04_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"22", - "code":"24" + "p_code":"24", + "code":"26" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -221,8 +239,8 @@ "title":"Between Self-built Databases", "uri":"drs_02_0490.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"18", - "code":"25" + "p_code":"19", + "code":"27" }, { "desc":"When a task is being started or in the full migration phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.To maintain data co", @@ -230,8 +248,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_03_1117.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"25", - "code":"26" + "p_code":"27", + "code":"28" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -239,8 +257,8 @@ "title":"Task Management", "uri":"drs_04_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"18", - "code":"27" + "p_code":"19", + "code":"29" }, { "desc":"A complete real-time migration consists of creating a migration task, tracking task progress, analyzing migration logs, and comparing data consistency. By comparing multi", @@ -248,8 +266,8 @@ "title":"Step 1: Create a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_02_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"27", - "code":"28" + "p_code":"29", + "code":"30" }, { "desc":"The migration progress of a real-time migration task helps you keep track of the status of the migration task.DRS shows the migration progress using a progress bar, helpi", @@ -257,8 +275,8 @@ "title":"Step 2: Query the Migration Progress", "uri":"drs_02_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"27", - "code":"29" + "p_code":"29", + "code":"31" }, { "desc":"Migration logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the migration process. This section describes how to view migration logs to locate and ", @@ -266,8 +284,8 @@ "title":"Step 3: View Migration Logs", "uri":"drs_02_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"27", - "code":"30" + "p_code":"29", + "code":"32" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to compare migration items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. By comparing migration objects, you ", @@ -275,8 +293,8 @@ "title":"Step 4: Compare Migration Items", "uri":"drs_02_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"27", - "code":"31" + "p_code":"29", + "code":"33" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -284,8 +302,8 @@ "title":"Managing Objects", "uri":"drs_03_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"27", - "code":"32" + "p_code":"29", + "code":"34" }, { "desc":"During a database migration, accounts need to be migrated separately.During the migration of MySQL databases, there are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts", @@ -293,8 +311,8 @@ "title":"Migrating Accounts", "uri":"drs_09_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"32", - "code":"33" + "p_code":"34", + "code":"35" }, { "desc":"Parameter comparison helps you check consistency between the source and destination database data to ensure your services will not be affected after being migrated.This s", @@ -302,8 +320,8 @@ "title":"Parameters for Comparison", "uri":"drs_08_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"32", - "code":"34" + "p_code":"34", + "code":"36" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -311,8 +329,8 @@ "title":"Task Life Cycle", "uri":"drs_03_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"27", - "code":"35" + "p_code":"29", + "code":"37" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to view details about a migration task, including information about the task, replication instance, and migration.You have logged in to the DRS", @@ -320,8 +338,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Task Details", "uri":"drs_04_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"36" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"38" }, { "desc":"After a migration task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask start", @@ -329,8 +347,8 @@ "title":"Editing Migration Task Information", "uri":"drs_04_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"37" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"39" }, { "desc":"During the migration, you may change the password of the source or destination database. As a result, the migration task fails. In this case, you need to change the passw", @@ -338,8 +356,8 @@ "title":"Modifying Connection Information", "uri":"drs_03_1135.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"38" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"40" }, { "desc":"You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration type", @@ -347,8 +365,8 @@ "title":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode", "uri":"drs_03_0046.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"39" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"41" }, { "desc":"For a migration task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the task information, replication ", @@ -356,8 +374,8 @@ "title":"Editing a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"40" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"42" }, { "desc":"A fault may occur during the migration due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space. After the fault is rectified based on the migration log information, y", @@ -365,8 +383,8 @@ "title":"Resuming a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_09_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"41" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"43" }, { "desc":"During the migration, if a migration task fails due to uncertain causes, the background will resume the task several times. However, the task may fail to be recovered in ", @@ -374,8 +392,8 @@ "title":"Resetting a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"42" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"44" }, { "desc":"During migration, if the flow control mode cannot meet the requirements during peak hours, you can pause the migration task.You can pause the following migration tasks:To", @@ -383,8 +401,8 @@ "title":"Pausing a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0109.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"43" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"45" }, { "desc":"After the source database and services are migrated to the destination database, you can stop the migration task. To prevent data from being overwritten after the source ", @@ -392,8 +410,8 @@ "title":"Stopping a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"44" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"46" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to delete a migration task that has been completed or has failed. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution ", @@ -401,8 +419,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_03_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"45" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"47" }, { "desc":"Migration statuses indicate different migration phases.Table 1 lists statuses and descriptions of online migration tasks.If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the ta", @@ -410,8 +428,8 @@ "title":"Task Statuses", "uri":"drs_03_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"35", - "code":"46" + "p_code":"37", + "code":"48" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -419,8 +437,8 @@ "title":"Tag Management", "uri":"drs_online_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"18", - "code":"47" + "p_code":"19", + "code":"49" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -429,7 +447,7 @@ "uri":"drs_04_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"48" + "code":"50" }, { "desc":"It often becomes necessary to hide the real IP address of your database for the sake of security. Migrating data through direct connections is an option, but costly. DRS ", @@ -437,8 +455,8 @@ "title":"Migration Overview", "uri":"drs_offline_migration.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"48", - "code":"49" + "p_code":"50", + "code":"51" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Backup Migration.This section describes constraints on backup migrations ", @@ -446,8 +464,8 @@ "title":"Creating an RDS Backup Migration Task", "uri":"drs_02_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"48", - "code":"50" + "p_code":"50", + "code":"52" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Backup Migration.This section describes constraints on backup migrations ", @@ -455,8 +473,8 @@ "title":"Creating a Backup Using OBS Buckets", "uri":"drs_02_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"48", - "code":"51" + "p_code":"50", + "code":"53" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -464,8 +482,8 @@ "title":"Task Management", "uri":"drs_04_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"48", - "code":"52" + "p_code":"50", + "code":"54" }, { "desc":"The Basic Information page of a backup migration task displays information about the task, backup files, and databases. This section describes how to view details about c", @@ -473,8 +491,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Task Details", "uri":"drs_04_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"52", - "code":"53" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"55" }, { "desc":"After a backup migration task is created, you can modify basic information about the task to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task na", @@ -482,8 +500,8 @@ "title":"Editing Migration Task Information", "uri":"drs_04_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"52", - "code":"54" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"56" }, { "desc":"Migration logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the migration process. This section describes how to view migration logs to locate and ", @@ -491,8 +509,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Migration Logs", "uri":"drs_04_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"52", - "code":"55" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"57" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to delete a migration task. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution when performing this operation.You hav", @@ -500,8 +518,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Migration Task", "uri":"drs_04_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"52", - "code":"56" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"58" }, { "desc":"Migration statuses indicate different migration phases.Table 1 lists statuses and descriptions of backup migration tasks.Deleted migration tasks are not displayed in the ", @@ -509,8 +527,8 @@ "title":"Task Statuses", "uri":"drs_03_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"52", - "code":"57" + "p_code":"54", + "code":"59" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -518,8 +536,8 @@ "title":"Tag Management", "uri":"drs_backup_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"48", - "code":"58" + "p_code":"50", + "code":"60" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -528,7 +546,7 @@ "uri":"drs_10_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"59" + "code":"61" }, { "desc":"DRS real-time synchronization supports multiple topology types. You can plan the topology types as required. For details, see the following content.To ensure data consist", @@ -536,8 +554,8 @@ "title":"Data Synchronization Topologies", "uri":"drs_11_0457.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"60" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"62" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -545,8 +563,8 @@ "title":"To the Cloud", "uri":"drs_06_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"61" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"63" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -554,17 +572,17 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0102.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"61", - "code":"62" + "p_code":"63", + "code":"64" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", "product_code":"drs", - "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed", + "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB Distributed", "uri":"drs_04_0104.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"61", - "code":"63" + "p_code":"63", + "code":"65" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -572,8 +590,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby", "uri":"drs_03_1124.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"61", - "code":"64" + "p_code":"63", + "code":"66" }, { "desc":"Table 2 lists the objects that can be synchronized in different scenarios. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the synchronization.To start a syn", @@ -581,8 +599,17 @@ "title":"From PostgreSQL to PostgreSQL", "uri":"drs_04_0107.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"61", - "code":"65" + "p_code":"63", + "code":"67" + }, + { + "desc":"When a task is being started or in the full synchronization phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.To keep data ", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"From Oracle to PostgreSQL", + "uri":"drs_04_0446.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"63", + "code":"68" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -590,8 +617,8 @@ "title":"Out of the Cloud", "uri":"drs_04_0451.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"66" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"69" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -599,17 +626,26 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0117.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"66", - "code":"67" + "p_code":"69", + "code":"70" + }, + { + "desc":"DMS for KafkaYou have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.The s", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"From MySQL to Kafka", + "uri":"drs_04_0118.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"69", + "code":"71" }, { "desc":"Table 2 lists the objects that can be synchronized in different scenarios. DRS will automatically check the objects you selected before the synchronization.Before you sta", "product_code":"drs", - "title":"From GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed to MySQL", + "title":"From GaussDB Distributed to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0121.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"66", - "code":"68" + "p_code":"69", + "code":"72" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -617,8 +653,8 @@ "title":"Between Self-built Databases", "uri":"drs_04_0452.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"69" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"73" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.When a task is bei", @@ -626,8 +662,17 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_03_1118.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"69", - "code":"70" + "p_code":"73", + "code":"74" + }, + { + "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.The success of dat", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"From MySQL to Kafka", + "uri":"drs_04_0128.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"73", + "code":"75" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -635,8 +680,8 @@ "title":"Task Management", "uri":"drs_TaskMangement.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"71" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"76" }, { "desc":"A complete real-time synchronization consists of creating a synchronization task, tracking task progress, analyzing synchronization logs, and comparing data consistency. ", @@ -644,8 +689,8 @@ "title":"Step 1: Create a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_06_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"71", - "code":"72" + "p_code":"76", + "code":"77" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to check the synchronization progress.During a full synchronization, DRS displays the progress overview. You can view the structure, data, and ", @@ -653,8 +698,8 @@ "title":"Step 2: Query the Synchronization Progress", "uri":"drs_10_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"71", - "code":"73" + "p_code":"76", + "code":"78" }, { "desc":"Synchronization logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the synchronization process. This section describes how to view synchronization l", @@ -662,8 +707,8 @@ "title":"Step 3: View Synchronization Logs", "uri":"drs_10_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"71", - "code":"74" + "p_code":"76", + "code":"79" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to compare synchronization items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. To minimize the impact on serv", @@ -671,8 +716,8 @@ "title":"Step 4: Compare Synchronization Items", "uri":"drs_10_0012.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"71", - "code":"75" + "p_code":"76", + "code":"80" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -680,8 +725,8 @@ "title":"Managing Objects", "uri":"drs_05_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"71", - "code":"76" + "p_code":"76", + "code":"81" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to change synchronization objects in a synchronization task. After a data synchronization task is created, you can change synchronization objec", @@ -689,8 +734,8 @@ "title":"Editing Synchronization Objects", "uri":"drs_10_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"76", - "code":"77" + "p_code":"81", + "code":"82" }, { "desc":"Data synchronization allows you to synchronize objects (including databases, schemas and tables) in a sources database to the corresponding objects in a destination datab", @@ -698,8 +743,8 @@ "title":"Mapping Object Names", "uri":"drs_10_0015.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"76", - "code":"78" + "p_code":"81", + "code":"83" }, { "desc":"During real-time synchronization, the objects that can be mapped to the destination include databases, schemas, tables, and columns (in data processing). After a mapping ", @@ -707,8 +752,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Synchronization Mapping Information", "uri":"drs_10_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"76", - "code":"79" + "p_code":"81", + "code":"84" }, { "desc":"DRS processes synchronized objects and allows you to add rules for selected objects. The processing rules supported by each data flow type are different.In many-to-one ma", @@ -716,8 +761,8 @@ "title":"Processing Data", "uri":"drs_03_0035.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"76", - "code":"80" + "p_code":"81", + "code":"85" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -725,8 +770,8 @@ "title":"Task Life Cycle", "uri":"drs_05_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"71", - "code":"81" + "p_code":"76", + "code":"86" }, { "desc":"View the information about the synchronization tasks and synchronization instances. This section describes how to view details about a synchronization task you have creat", @@ -734,8 +779,8 @@ "title":"Viewing Task Details", "uri":"drs_10_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"82" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"87" }, { "desc":"After a synchronization task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask", @@ -743,8 +788,8 @@ "title":"Modifying Task Information", "uri":"drs_10_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"83" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"88" }, { "desc":"A data synchronization task may fail due to the change of the password of the source or destination database. You need to update the information and then retry the synchr", @@ -752,8 +797,8 @@ "title":"Modifying Connection Information", "uri":"drs_10_0016.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"84" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"89" }, { "desc":"You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration type", @@ -761,8 +806,8 @@ "title":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode", "uri":"drs_10_0401.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"85" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"90" }, { "desc":"For a synchronization task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the source and destination d", @@ -770,8 +815,8 @@ "title":"Editing a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"86" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"91" }, { "desc":"A fault may occur during the synchronization due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space. After the fault is rectified based on the synchronization log in", @@ -779,8 +824,8 @@ "title":"Resuming a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0400.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"87" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"92" }, { "desc":"DRS allows you to pause real-time synchronization tasks.The following tasks can be paused during incremental synchronization:To the cloudMySQL->MySQLPostgreSQL->PostgreSQ", @@ -788,8 +833,8 @@ "title":"Pausing a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_03_0110.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"88" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"93" }, { "desc":"During real-time synchronization, you can reset the synchronization tasks in one of the following statuses so that you do not need to configure the tasks again.PausedIncr", @@ -797,8 +842,8 @@ "title":"Resetting a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0300.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"89" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"94" }, { "desc":"After the source database and services are migrated to the destination database, you can stop the synchronization task. To prevent data from being overwritten after the s", @@ -806,8 +851,8 @@ "title":"Stopping a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"90" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"95" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to delete a synchronization task that has been completed or has failed. Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise ca", @@ -815,8 +860,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a Synchronization Task", "uri":"drs_10_0014.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"91" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"96" }, { "desc":"Synchronization statuses indicate different synchronization phases.", @@ -824,8 +869,8 @@ "title":"Task Statuses", "uri":"drs_06_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"81", - "code":"92" + "p_code":"86", + "code":"97" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -833,8 +878,8 @@ "title":"Tag Management", "uri":"drs_synchronization_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"93" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"98" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -842,17 +887,35 @@ "title":"Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios", "uri":"drs_03_1113.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"59", - "code":"94" + "p_code":"61", + "code":"99" }, { - "desc":"This section describes how to clear the streaming replication slots of the source GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed database after the incremental or full+incremental sy", + "desc":"Data synchronized to the Kafka cluster is stored in JSON, and JSON-C formats.For details about the JSON format from MySQL to Kafka, see Table 1. Parameters for synchroniz", "product_code":"drs", - "title":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed", + "title":"Kafka Message Format", + "uri":"drs_03_0052.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"99", + "code":"100" + }, + { + "desc":"No security authentication mode is available. You only need to enter the IP address and port for connection.The SASL mechanism is used to connect to Kafka, and you need t", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"Kafka Authentication", + "uri":"drs_05_0018.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"99", + "code":"101" + }, + { + "desc":"This section describes how to clear the streaming replication slots of the source GaussDB distributed database after the incremental or full+incremental synchronization t", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of GaussDB Distributed", "uri":"drs_03_1131.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"95" + "p_code":"99", + "code":"102" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to clear the logical replication slot of the source database, how to synchronize sequence values, and how to reset the sequence values in the d", @@ -860,8 +923,8 @@ "title":"Forcibly Stopping Synchronization of PostgreSQL", "uri":"drs_12_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"96" + "p_code":"99", + "code":"103" }, { "desc":"This section describes how to perform real-time synchronization from PostgreSQL to RDS PostgreSQL. You can create triggers and functions in the source database to obtain ", @@ -869,8 +932,8 @@ "title":"Creating Triggers and Functions to Implement Incremental DDL Synchronization for PostgreSQL", "uri":"drs_03_0088.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"94", - "code":"97" + "p_code":"99", + "code":"104" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -879,7 +942,7 @@ "uri":"drs_03_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"98" + "code":"105" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -887,8 +950,8 @@ "title":"DR Scenarios", "uri":"drs_02_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"98", - "code":"99" + "p_code":"105", + "code":"106" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", @@ -896,8 +959,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to MySQL", "uri":"drs_04_0122.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"99", - "code":"100" + "p_code":"106", + "code":"107" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", @@ -905,8 +968,8 @@ "title":"From MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL) Primary/Standby", "uri":"drs_04_0123.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"99", - "code":"101" + "p_code":"106", + "code":"108" }, { "desc":"You have logged in to the DRS console.For details about the supported DB types and versions, see Real-Time Disaster Recovery.During the DR initialization, do not perform ", @@ -914,8 +977,8 @@ "title":"From Cassandra to Cassandra", "uri":"drs_04_0125.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"99", - "code":"102" + "p_code":"106", + "code":"109" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -923,8 +986,8 @@ "title":"Task Management", "uri":"drs_07_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"98", - "code":"103" + "p_code":"105", + "code":"110" }, { "desc":"To prevent service unavailability caused by regional faults, DRS provides disaster recovery to ensure service continuity. If the region where the primary instance is loca", @@ -932,8 +995,8 @@ "title":"Step 1: Create a DR Task", "uri":"drs_02_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"103", - "code":"104" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"111" }, { "desc":"After a DR task starts, you can check the DR progress.You have logged in to the DRS console.A DR task has been created and started.On the Disaster Recovery Progress tab, ", @@ -941,8 +1004,8 @@ "title":"Step 2: Query the DR Progress", "uri":"drs_02_0028.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"103", - "code":"105" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"112" }, { "desc":"DR logs refer to the warning-, error-, and info-level logs generated during the DR process. This section describes how to view DR logs to locate and analyze database prob", @@ -950,8 +1013,8 @@ "title":"Step 3: View DR Logs", "uri":"drs_02_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"103", - "code":"106" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"113" }, { "desc":"DR item comparison: You can compare DR items to check data consistency between the service database and DR database. Currently, you can compare the following items during", @@ -959,8 +1022,8 @@ "title":"Step 4: Compare DR Items", "uri":"drs_02_0033.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"103", - "code":"107" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"114" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -968,8 +1031,8 @@ "title":"Task Life Cycle", "uri":"drs_07_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"103", - "code":"108" + "p_code":"110", + "code":"115" }, { "desc":"After a DR task is created, you can modify task information to identify different tasks.The following task information can be edited:Task nameDescriptionTask start timeYo", @@ -977,8 +1040,8 @@ "title":"Editing Subscription Task Information", "uri":"drs_03_1134.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"108", - "code":"109" + "p_code":"115", + "code":"116" }, { "desc":"DRS allows you to change the flow control mode for a task. Currently, only the following DR tasks support this function.MySQL->MySQLMySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/st", @@ -986,8 +1049,8 @@ "title":"Modifying the Flow Control Mode", "uri":"drs_03_0047.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"108", - "code":"110" + "p_code":"115", + "code":"117" }, { "desc":"For a DR task that has been created but not started, DRS allows you to edit the configuration information of the task, including the source and destination database detai", @@ -995,8 +1058,8 @@ "title":"Editing a DR Task", "uri":"drs_03_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"108", - "code":"111" + "p_code":"115", + "code":"118" }, { "desc":"A fault may occur during DR due to external factors, such as insufficient storage space.If a DR task fails due to non-network problems, the system will automatically resu", @@ -1004,8 +1067,8 @@ "title":"Resuming a DR Task", "uri":"drs_03_0027.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"108", - "code":"112" + "p_code":"115", + "code":"119" }, { "desc":"DRS monitors the DB instance performance and the migration progress. With the monitoring information, you can determine the data flow health status, data integrity, and d", @@ -1013,8 +1076,8 @@ "title":"Viewing DR Metrics", "uri":"drs_03_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"108", - "code":"113" + "p_code":"115", + "code":"120" }, { "desc":"DRS supports primary/standby switchover for DR tasks. If both RPO and RTO are 0, data has been completely migrated to the DR database. Then, you can determine whether to ", @@ -1022,8 +1085,8 @@ "title":"Performing a Primary/Standby Switchover for DR Tasks", "uri":"drs_03_1116.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"108", - "code":"114" + "p_code":"115", + "code":"121" }, { "desc":"When the DR task is complete or no longer needed, you can stop the DR task. You can stop a task in any of the following statuses:CreatingConfigurationInitializingDisaster", @@ -1031,8 +1094,8 @@ "title":"Stopping a DR Task", "uri":"drs_03_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"108", - "code":"115" + "p_code":"115", + "code":"122" }, { "desc":"You can delete a DR task, when it is no longer needed Deleted tasks will no longer be displayed in the task list. Exercise caution when performing this operation.You have", @@ -1040,8 +1103,8 @@ "title":"Deleting a DR Task", "uri":"drs_03_0030.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"108", - "code":"116" + "p_code":"115", + "code":"123" }, { "desc":"DR statuses indicate different DR phases.Table 1 lists DR task statuses and descriptions.If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. Af", @@ -1049,8 +1112,8 @@ "title":"Task Statuses", "uri":"drs_02_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"108", - "code":"117" + "p_code":"115", + "code":"124" }, { "desc":"Tag Management Service (TMS) enables you to use tags on the management console to manage resources. TMS works with other cloud services to manage tags. TMS manages tags g", @@ -1058,8 +1121,8 @@ "title":"Tag Management", "uri":"drs_disaster_tag.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"98", - "code":"118" + "p_code":"105", + "code":"125" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1068,7 +1131,7 @@ "uri":"drs_01_0099.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"119" + "code":"126" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1076,8 +1139,8 @@ "title":"Product Consulting", "uri":"drs_01_0103.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"120" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"127" }, { "desc":"A region and availability zone (AZ) identify the location of a data center. You can create resources in a specific region and AZ.A region is a physical data center. Each ", @@ -1085,8 +1148,8 @@ "title":"What Are Regions and AZs?", "uri":"drs_16_0103.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"120", - "code":"121" + "p_code":"127", + "code":"128" }, { "desc":"DRS is a stable, efficient, and easy-to-use cloud service for database migration and synchronization in real time.It simplifies data migration processes and reduces migra", @@ -1094,8 +1157,8 @@ "title":"What Is DRS?", "uri":"drs_01_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"120", - "code":"122" + "p_code":"127", + "code":"129" }, { "desc":"Yes. DRS provides high availability and can migrate a single RDS instance or RDS primary/standby instances. DRS can automatically rebuild the databases connection after a", @@ -1103,8 +1166,8 @@ "title":"Can DRS Migrate RDS Primary/Standby Instances?", "uri":"drs_01_0105.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"120", - "code":"123" + "p_code":"127", + "code":"130" }, { "desc":"In database migration scenarios, if a migration task fails due to unavoidable problems (such as network fluctuation), DRS records the current parsing and replay point (wh", @@ -1112,8 +1175,8 @@ "title":"Does DRS Support Resumable Uploads?", "uri":"drs_04_0031.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"120", - "code":"124" + "p_code":"127", + "code":"131" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1121,8 +1184,8 @@ "title":"What Are the Differences Between Real-Time Migration, Real-Time DR, and Real-Time Synchronization?", "uri":"drs_04_0087.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"120", - "code":"125" + "p_code":"127", + "code":"132" }, { "desc":"In the full migration phase, DRS uses the row-level parallel migration mode to ensure migration performance and transmission stability. If the source database data is com", @@ -1130,8 +1193,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Solve the Table Bloat Issue?", "uri":"drs_16_1133.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"120", - "code":"126" + "p_code":"127", + "code":"133" }, { "desc":"RDS read replicas cannot be selected on the DRS console. You can select Self-built on ECS and enter the read replica IP address and port number to connect to the instance", @@ -1139,8 +1202,8 @@ "title":"Why Cannot I Select RDS Read Replicas on the DRS Console?", "uri":"drs_16_1142.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"120", - "code":"127" + "p_code":"127", + "code":"134" }, { "desc":"During the initialization of a full migration or synchronization task, DRS needs to query all inventory data in the source database. DRS uses simple SQL statements to que", @@ -1148,8 +1211,8 @@ "title":"How Does DRS Affect the Source and Destination Databases?", "uri":"drs_16_1145.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"120", - "code":"128" + "p_code":"127", + "code":"135" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1157,8 +1220,8 @@ "title":"Network and Security", "uri":"drs_01_0108.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"129" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"136" }, { "desc":"Uses security groups to ensure that the sources of access are trusted.Uses SSL channels to encrypt data during transmission.", @@ -1166,8 +1229,8 @@ "title":"What Security Protection Policies Does DRS Have?", "uri":"drs_01_0109.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"129", - "code":"130" + "p_code":"136", + "code":"137" }, { "desc":"If the network is disconnected during the migration, you can view the task status first. If a full or incremental task fails, click Resume in the Operation column.Full mi", @@ -1175,8 +1238,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do If the Network Is Disconnected During the Migration?", "uri":"drs_01_0110.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"129", - "code":"131" + "p_code":"136", + "code":"138" }, { "desc":"By default, a VPC on the current cloud is isolated from external networks for security reasons. You cannot use an EIP outside a VPC (for example, an EIP of another cloud ", @@ -1184,8 +1247,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Configure a VPC Security Group to Allow Traffic from an EIP?", "uri":"drs_01_0112.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"129", - "code":"132" + "p_code":"136", + "code":"139" }, { "desc":"Before data migration, ensure that network preparations and security rule settings are complete. If the connection is abnormal, check whether the network configuration is", @@ -1193,8 +1256,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do If the Network Connection Between the Replication Instance and Database Is Abnormal?", "uri":"drs_02_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"129", - "code":"133" + "p_code":"136", + "code":"140" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1202,8 +1265,8 @@ "title":"Permissions Management", "uri":"drs_04_0040.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"134" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"141" }, { "desc":"DRS has certain permission requirements on accounts during migration, synchronization, and DR. This section describes the permission requirements on the MySQL engine.You ", @@ -1211,8 +1274,8 @@ "title":"Which MySQL Permissions Are Required for DRS?", "uri":"drs_04_0034.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"135" + "p_code":"141", + "code":"142" }, { "desc":"mysql -h 'host' -u 'user' -p-N $@ -e \"SELECT CONCAT('SHOW GRANTS FOR ''', user, '''@''', host, ''';') AS query FROM mysql.user\" > /tmp/users.sqlhost indicates the IP add", @@ -1220,8 +1283,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Import Users and Permissions from the Source to the Destination Database?", "uri":"drs_12_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"134", - "code":"136" + "p_code":"141", + "code":"143" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1229,8 +1292,8 @@ "title":"Real-Time Migration", "uri":"drs_04_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"137" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"144" }, { "desc":"You can refer to the following methods to check whether the task can be stopped. Before stopping the task, ensure that:At least one complete data comparison is performed ", @@ -1238,8 +1301,8 @@ "title":"When Can I Stop a Migration Task?", "uri":"drs_01_0104.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"138" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"145" }, { "desc":"Definer is used in views, stored procedures, triggers, and events. Definer does not restrict the permission to invoke objects, instead the permission to access the databa", @@ -1247,8 +1310,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Maintain the Original Service User Permission System After Definer Is Forcibly Converted During MySQL Migration?", "uri":"drs_16_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"139" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"146" }, { "desc":"After the MySQL stored procedure is migrated to the cloud, an error may occur when the stored procedure or function is invoked due to permission problems.The method varie", @@ -1256,8 +1319,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do If the Invoking Permission Problem Occurs After the MySQL Stored Procedure Is Migrated to the Cloud?", "uri":"drs_16_0121.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"140" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"147" }, { "desc":"To ensure that all services on the database are stopped, perform the following steps:", @@ -1265,8 +1328,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Ensure that All Services on the Database Are Stopped?", "uri":"drs_04_0020.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"141" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"148" }, { "desc":"When you use a subaccount to use scheduled task startup function, the account entrustment function must be used. Otherwise, the scheduled task fails to be started, leavin", @@ -1274,8 +1337,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do When Scheduled Task Failed to Start Leaving Message \"can not get agency token\"", "uri":"drs_16_0123.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"142" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"149" }, { "desc":"Currently, RDS for MySQL does not support the MyISAM engine due to the following reasons.MyISAM engine tables do not support transactions and support only table-level loc", @@ -1283,8 +1346,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do If MyISAM Tables Are Not Supported by RDS for MySQL?", "uri":"drs_04_0032.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"143" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"150" }, { "desc":"Based on MySQL 5.7, some new features have been added to MySQL 8.0. There are performance differences between the two versions. Before migration, you need to analyze comp", @@ -1292,8 +1355,8 @@ "title":"What Are the Precautions for Migrating Data from an Earlier Version MySQL to MySQL 8.0?", "uri":"drs_04_0030.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"144" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"151" }, { "desc":"Out of memory (OOM) occurs during the migration of MongoDB databases, causing migration failures.The possible causes are as follows:If the mongod service of the source da", @@ -1301,8 +1364,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do When OOM Occurs During the Migration of MongoDB Databases?", "uri":"drs_15_0100.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"145" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"152" }, { "desc":"Before using the DRS service to migrate collections between sharded clusters, you must disable the balancer of the collections to be migrated.After the migration is compl", @@ -1310,8 +1373,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Disable the Balancer?", "uri":"drs_16_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"146" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"153" }, { "desc":"During the MySQL to MySQL migration, if the migration log indicates that the migration of events and triggers fails after the migration task is complete, you can manually", @@ -1319,8 +1382,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Export and Import Events and Triggers in Batches?", "uri":"drs_14_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"147" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"154" }, { "desc":"When the value of source database parameter lower_case_table_names is set to 1, the databases or tables whose names contain uppercase letters cannot be migrated.When the ", @@ -1328,8 +1391,8 @@ "title":"How Can I Migrate Databases or Tables Whose Names Contain Uppercase Letters?", "uri":"drs_14_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"148" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"155" }, { "desc":"In a sharded cluster, orphaned documents are those documents on a shard that also exist in chunks on other shards as a result of failed migrations or incomplete migration", @@ -1337,8 +1400,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Delete Orphaned Documents in MongoDB Sharded Clusters?", "uri":"drs_09_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"137", - "code":"149" + "p_code":"144", + "code":"156" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1346,8 +1409,8 @@ "title":"Backup Migration", "uri":"drs_04_0457.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"150" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"157" }, { "desc":"During the backup migration, If Last Backup File is selected by mistake, perform either of the following operations:If you select Yes by mistake, the database receives a ", @@ -1355,8 +1418,8 @@ "title":"What Should I Do If the Last Backup File Is Incorrectly Selected in the Backup Migration Scenario?", "uri":"drs_04_0041.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"150", - "code":"151" + "p_code":"157", + "code":"158" }, { "desc":"After data is migrated from the local host or VMs to the RDS SQL Server DB instance on the current cloud through DRS, the Login accounts, DBLink, AgentJobs, and key confi", @@ -1364,8 +1427,8 @@ "title":"Manual Configuration", "uri":"drs_04_0458.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"150", - "code":"152" + "p_code":"157", + "code":"159" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1373,8 +1436,8 @@ "title":"Real-Time Synchronization", "uri":"drs_04_0026.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"153" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"160" }, { "desc":"DRS can directly synchronize tables of different schemas to those of the same schema if the tables do not conflict with each other.", @@ -1382,8 +1445,8 @@ "title":"Can DRS Sync Tables of Different Schemas to the Same Schema?", "uri":"drs_16_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"153", - "code":"154" + "p_code":"160", + "code":"161" }, { "desc":"During table-level incremental synchronization from MySQL to MySQL, you can use Online DDL tools to add or delete columns. Pay attention to the following when using Onlin", @@ -1391,8 +1454,26 @@ "title":"Can Online DDL Tools Be Used for Real-time Synchronization?", "uri":"drs_16_1124.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"153", - "code":"155" + "p_code":"160", + "code":"162" + }, + { + "desc":"If the source Oracle database is an RAC cluster, you are advised to use SCAN IP+SERVICE_NAMES to create a task because SCAN IP has stronger fault tolerance, better load b", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"Why Do I Use the SCAN IP Address to Connect to an Oracle RAC Cluster?", + "uri":"drs_16_1151.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"160", + "code":"163" + }, + { + "desc":"In physical standby mode, the Oracle database directly replicates logs from the primary database and does not generate any logs. If the source is an Oracle database, you ", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"How Do I Check Supplemental Logging of the Source Oracle Database?", + "uri":"drs_16_1155.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"160", + "code":"164" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1400,8 +1481,8 @@ "title":"Real-Time Disaster Recovery", "uri":"drs_04_0028.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"156" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"165" }, { "desc":"Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the difference between the time when a transaction in the current service database is submitted and the time when the transaction", @@ -1409,8 +1490,8 @@ "title":"What Are RPO and RTO of DRS Disaster Recovery?", "uri":"drs_04_0033.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"156", - "code":"157" + "p_code":"165", + "code":"166" }, { "desc":"For real-time DR tasks, if the service database is faulty, manually perform a primary/standby switchover. For details, see Performing a Primary/Standby Switchover for DR ", @@ -1418,8 +1499,8 @@ "title":"Is a Primary/Standby Switchover Triggered Automatically or Manually for DR Tasks?", "uri":"drs_16_1125.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"156", - "code":"158" + "p_code":"165", + "code":"167" }, { "desc":"Real-time DR is performed by instance. You cannot select a specified database, but you can select tables or databases for real-time migration and synchronization task.", @@ -1427,8 +1508,8 @@ "title":"Can Real-Time DR Be Performed for Specified Databases?", "uri":"drs_16_1126.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"156", - "code":"159" + "p_code":"165", + "code":"168" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1436,8 +1517,8 @@ "title":"Data-Level Comparison", "uri":"drs_14_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"160" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"169" }, { "desc":"DRS's data comparison allows you to check whether the data in the source database is the same as that in the destination database.DRS does not support value comparison fo", @@ -1445,8 +1526,8 @@ "title":"Which of the Following Data Types Are Not Supported By Value Comparison?", "uri":"drs_16_1130.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"160", - "code":"161" + "p_code":"169", + "code":"170" }, { "desc":"Object comparison: System tables of the source and destination databases are queried, occupying about 10 sessions. The database is not affected. However, if there are a l", @@ -1454,8 +1535,8 @@ "title":"What Impact Does a DRS Comparison Task Have on Databases?", "uri":"drs_16_1161.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"160", - "code":"162" + "p_code":"169", + "code":"171" }, { "desc":"Object comparison: Generally, the comparison results are returned within several minutes based on the query performance of the source database. If the amount of data is l", @@ -1463,8 +1544,8 @@ "title":"How Long Does a DRS Comparison Task Take?", "uri":"drs_16_1162.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"160", - "code":"163" + "p_code":"169", + "code":"172" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1472,8 +1553,8 @@ "title":"General Operations", "uri":"drs_04_0029.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"164" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"173" }, { "desc":"Information often overlaps when you decrease the size of the page. You are advised to set the page scale at 100%.", @@ -1481,8 +1562,8 @@ "title":"What Can I Do When Information Overlaps on the DRS Console?", "uri":"drs_15_0120.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"165" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"174" }, { "desc":"During the migration, the destination instance can be set to read-only or read/write.Read-only: During the migration, the destination instance is read-only. After the mig", @@ -1490,8 +1571,8 @@ "title":"Is the Destination Instance Set to Read-only or Read/Write?", "uri":"drs_04_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"166" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"175" }, { "desc":"During migration for MySQL databases, the source database binlog must be in the ROW format. Otherwise, the task fails. After binlog_format=ROW at the global level is set ", @@ -1499,8 +1580,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Set Global binlog_format=ROW to Take Effect Immediately?", "uri":"drs_16_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"167" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"176" }, { "desc":"When migrating MySQL databases, ensure that the binlog_row_image parameter of the source database is set to FULL. Otherwise, the migration task will fail. After binlog_ro", @@ -1508,8 +1589,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Set binlog_row_image=FULL to Take Effect Immediately?", "uri":"drs_16_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"168" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"177" }, { "desc":"When you set the password for the migration account in the destination database, you need to set the password based on the password strength requirements of the destinati", @@ -1517,8 +1598,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Change the Destination Database Password to Meet the Password Policy?", "uri":"drs_14_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"169" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"178" }, { "desc":"MongoDB shards data at the collection level, distributing the collection data using shard keys.You choose the shard key when sharding a collection. Each record contains a", @@ -1526,8 +1607,8 @@ "title":"How Do I Configure the Shard Key for a MongoDB Sharded Cluster?", "uri":"drs_14_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"170" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"179" }, { "desc":"When the cloud connection bandwidth is expanded, the bandwidth link needs to be re-established and the network is disconnected. Whether the network disconnection affects ", @@ -1535,8 +1616,8 @@ "title":"Does Bandwidth Expansion Affect the Running DRS Tasks?", "uri":"drs_16_0102.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"171" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"180" }, { "desc":"In some MariaDB versions, the SysDB database is used as a system database (similar to the sys database of MySQL 5.7). Therefore, DRS considers the SysDB database as the s", @@ -1544,8 +1625,8 @@ "title":"Why Data in MariaDB and SysDB Cannot Be Migrated?", "uri":"drs_16_0122.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"172" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"181" }, { "desc":"DRS supports many-to-one scenarios during migration of different types of instances and tables to suit your service requirements.To ensure that there is sufficient space ", @@ -1553,8 +1634,8 @@ "title":"Constraints and Operation Suggestions on Many-to-One Scenario", "uri":"drs_16_0120.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"173" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"182" }, { "desc":"You can view DRS operation logs on the Cloud Trace Service (CTS) console.Click the username in the upper right corner and select Operation Log from the drop-down list.", @@ -1562,8 +1643,8 @@ "title":"Where Can I View DRS Operation Logs?", "uri":"drs_01_0101.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"174" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"183" }, { "desc":"No. DRS cannot restart a completed task.", @@ -1571,8 +1652,8 @@ "title":"Can a Completed Task Be Restarted?", "uri":"drs_16_1140.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"175" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"184" }, { "desc":"You can reset a task when the task is suspended or fails. Resetting a task does not clear the destination database. You can determine whether to clear the destination dat", @@ -1580,8 +1661,8 @@ "title":"What Are the Differences Between Resetting a Task and Recreating a Task?", "uri":"drs_16_1143.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"164", - "code":"176" + "p_code":"173", + "code":"185" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1589,8 +1670,8 @@ "title":"Delay", "uri":"drs_16_1156.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"119", - "code":"177" + "p_code":"126", + "code":"186" }, { "desc":"Recovery Time Objective (RTO) is duration of time within which transactions on the DRS instance are transmitted and replayed to the destination database during incrementa", @@ -1598,8 +1679,8 @@ "title":"Why Does the Delay of DR Tasks Increase?", "uri":"drs_16_1148.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"177", - "code":"178" + "p_code":"186", + "code":"187" }, { "desc":"Migration from MongoDB to DDSMigration from DDS to MongoDBTo ensure the performance of migration, synchronization, or disaster recovery, DRS performs concurrent replay at", @@ -1607,8 +1688,8 @@ "title":"Why Is the Delay High In MongoDB Replication Scenarios?", "uri":"drs_16_1157.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"177", - "code":"179" + "p_code":"186", + "code":"188" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1617,7 +1698,7 @@ "uri":"drs_13_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"180" + "code":"189" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1625,8 +1706,8 @@ "title":"Solutions to Failed Check Items", "uri":"drs_11_0001.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"180", - "code":"181" + "p_code":"189", + "code":"190" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1634,8 +1715,8 @@ "title":"Disk Space", "uri":"drs_12_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"182" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"191" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1643,8 +1724,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has Sufficient Storage Space", "uri":"drs_11_0010.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"182", - "code":"183" + "p_code":"191", + "code":"192" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1652,8 +1733,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Server Has Sufficient Storage Space", "uri":"drs_11_0076.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"182", - "code":"184" + "p_code":"191", + "code":"193" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1661,8 +1742,8 @@ "title":"Database Parameters", "uri":"drs_12_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"185" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"194" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1670,8 +1751,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Enabled", "uri":"drs_11_0014.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"186" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"195" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1679,8 +1760,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Binlog Is Row-Based", "uri":"drs_11_0015.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"187" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"196" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1688,8 +1769,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Binlog Retention Period Is Set on the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0016.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"188" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"197" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1697,8 +1778,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Character Sets Are Consistent", "uri":"drs_11_0013.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"189" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"198" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1706,8 +1787,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database server_id Meets the Incremental Migration Requirements", "uri":"drs_11_0018.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"190" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"199" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1715,8 +1796,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Database Table Names Are Consistent in Case Sensitivity", "uri":"drs_11_0019.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"191" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"200" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1724,8 +1805,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Object Names with Non-ASCII Characters", "uri":"drs_11_0022.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"192" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"201" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1733,8 +1814,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the TIME_ZONE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0023.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"193" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"202" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1742,8 +1823,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the COLLATION_SERVER Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0024.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"194" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"203" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1751,8 +1832,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SERVER_UUID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0025.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"195" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"204" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1760,8 +1841,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SERVER_ID Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are Different", "uri":"drs_11_0044.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"196" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"205" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1769,8 +1850,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Invalid sql_mode Values", "uri":"drs_11_0049.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"197" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"206" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1778,8 +1859,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SQL_MODE Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0059.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"198" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"207" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1787,8 +1868,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the sql_mode Value in the Destination Database Is Not NO_ENGINE_SUBSTITUTION", "uri":"drs_11_0228.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"199" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"208" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1796,8 +1877,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the innodb_strict_mode Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0060.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"200" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"209" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1805,8 +1886,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the max_wal_senders Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured", "uri":"drs_11_0053.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"201" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"210" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1814,8 +1895,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the WAL_LEVEL Value in the Source Database Is Correct", "uri":"drs_11_0054.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"202" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"211" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1823,8 +1904,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the MAX_REPLICATION_SLOTS Value in the Source Database Is Correct", "uri":"drs_11_0055.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"203" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"212" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1832,8 +1913,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is on Standby", "uri":"drs_11_0056.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"204" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"213" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1841,8 +1922,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the log_slave_updates Value of the Source Database Is Correctly Configured", "uri":"drs_11_0061.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"205" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"214" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1850,8 +1931,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the BLOCK_SIZE Value of the Source Database Is the Same as That of the Destination Database", "uri":"drs_11_0063.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"206" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"215" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1859,8 +1940,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the binlog_row_image Value is FULL", "uri":"drs_11_0064.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"207" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"216" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1868,8 +1949,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Transaction Isolation Levels are Consistent", "uri":"drs_11_0453.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"208" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"217" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1877,8 +1958,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the lc_monetary Values of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0038.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"209" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"218" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1886,8 +1967,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Trigger Names with Non-ASCII Characters", "uri":"drs_11_0073.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"210" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"219" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1895,8 +1976,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Collections Contain More Than 10 Indexes", "uri":"drs_11_0200.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"211" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"220" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1904,8 +1985,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in Both the Source and Destination Databases", "uri":"drs_11_0227.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"212" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"221" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1913,8 +1994,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether log_bin_trust_function_creators Is Set to On in the Destination Database", "uri":"drs_11_0225.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"213" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"222" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1922,8 +2003,17 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the max_allowed_packet Value of the Destination Database Is too Small", "uri":"drs_15_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"214" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"223" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Character Set Is Supported", + "uri":"drs_03_043.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"194", + "code":"224" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1931,8 +2021,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Databases and Tables Exist", "uri":"drs_03_045.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"215" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"225" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1940,8 +2030,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether session_replication_role of the Destination Database Is correctly Set", "uri":"drs_03_1130.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"216" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"226" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1949,8 +2039,17 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the MongoDB Instance Type Matches the Migration Mode", "uri":"drs_11_0066.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"217" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"227" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"Checking the Physical Standby Database", + "uri":"drs_11_0465.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"194", + "code":"228" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1958,8 +2057,26 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Values of group_concat_max_len Are Consistent", "uri":"drs_11_0469.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"218" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"229" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"Checking Whether the Character Sets Are Compatible", + "uri":"drs_11_0471.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"194", + "code":"230" + }, + { + "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", + "product_code":"drs", + "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Unsupported Table Field Types", + "uri":"drs_11_0481.html", + "doc_type":"usermanual", + "p_code":"194", + "code":"231" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1967,8 +2084,8 @@ "title":"Checking Replication Attribute of Primary Key Columns", "uri":"drs_11_0482.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"185", - "code":"219" + "p_code":"194", + "code":"232" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1976,8 +2093,8 @@ "title":"Source DB Instance Statuses", "uri":"drs_11_0464.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"220" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"233" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1985,8 +2102,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source and Destination Databases Are of the Same Type", "uri":"drs_11_0046.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"220", - "code":"221" + "p_code":"233", + "code":"234" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -1994,8 +2111,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the ChangeStream API of the source DB instance is available", "uri":"drs_11_0463.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"220", - "code":"222" + "p_code":"233", + "code":"235" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2003,8 +2120,8 @@ "title":"Destination DB Instance Statuses", "uri":"drs_12_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"223" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"236" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2012,8 +2129,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Involved in Another Migration Task", "uri":"drs_11_0011.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"223", - "code":"224" + "p_code":"236", + "code":"237" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2021,8 +2138,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Has a Read Replica", "uri":"drs_11_0050.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"223", - "code":"225" + "p_code":"236", + "code":"238" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2030,8 +2147,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Extensions Are Supported", "uri":"drs_11_0041.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"223", - "code":"226" + "p_code":"236", + "code":"239" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2039,8 +2156,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether Destination Contains the Configured Database", "uri":"drs_11_0075.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"223", - "code":"227" + "p_code":"236", + "code":"240" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2048,8 +2165,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination DB Instance Is Available", "uri":"drs_11_0230.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"223", - "code":"228" + "p_code":"236", + "code":"241" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2057,8 +2174,8 @@ "title":"Database User Permissions", "uri":"drs_12_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"229" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"242" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2066,8 +2183,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database User Has Sufficient Permissions", "uri":"drs_11_0009.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"229", - "code":"230" + "p_code":"242", + "code":"243" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2075,8 +2192,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database User Has Sufficient Permissions", "uri":"drs_11_0008.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"229", - "code":"231" + "p_code":"242", + "code":"244" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2084,8 +2201,8 @@ "title":"Database Versions", "uri":"drs_12_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"232" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"245" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2093,8 +2210,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Version Is Supported", "uri":"drs_11_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"233" + "p_code":"245", + "code":"246" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2102,8 +2219,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Version Is Supported", "uri":"drs_11_0006.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"234" + "p_code":"245", + "code":"247" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2111,8 +2228,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Migration Is from an Earlier Database Version to the Same or a Later Version", "uri":"drs_11_0007.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"232", - "code":"235" + "p_code":"245", + "code":"248" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2120,8 +2237,8 @@ "title":"Networks", "uri":"drs_12_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"236" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"249" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2129,8 +2246,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Is Connected", "uri":"drs_precheck.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"236", - "code":"237" + "p_code":"249", + "code":"250" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2138,8 +2255,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Is Connected", "uri":"drs_11_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"236", - "code":"238" + "p_code":"249", + "code":"251" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2147,8 +2264,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Can Connect to the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0003.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"236", - "code":"239" + "p_code":"249", + "code":"252" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2156,8 +2273,8 @@ "title":"Database Objects", "uri":"drs_11_0067.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"240" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"253" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2165,8 +2282,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains a MyISAM Table", "uri":"drs_11_0048.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"240", - "code":"241" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"254" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2174,8 +2291,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains the Functions or Stored Procedures that the Source Database User Is Not Authorized to Migrate", "uri":"drs_11_0080.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"240", - "code":"242" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"255" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2183,8 +2300,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Use Storage Engines Not Supported by the Destination Database", "uri":"drs_11_0117.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"240", - "code":"243" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"256" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2192,8 +2309,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Tables Contain Primary Keys", "uri":"drs_15_0020.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"240", - "code":"244" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"257" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2201,8 +2318,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Triggers or Events", "uri":"drs_15_0021.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"240", - "code":"245" + "p_code":"253", + "code":"258" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2210,8 +2327,8 @@ "title":"Database Configuration Items", "uri":"drs_11_0068.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"246" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"259" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2219,8 +2336,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Name Is Valid", "uri":"drs_11_0045.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"246", - "code":"247" + "p_code":"259", + "code":"260" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2228,8 +2345,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database Table Name Is Valid", "uri":"drs_11_0105.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"246", - "code":"248" + "p_code":"259", + "code":"261" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2237,8 +2354,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Source Database View Name Is Valid", "uri":"drs_11_0072.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"246", - "code":"249" + "p_code":"259", + "code":"262" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2246,8 +2363,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Shard Key Can Be Obtained from the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0069.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"246", - "code":"250" + "p_code":"259", + "code":"263" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2255,8 +2372,8 @@ "title":"Conflicts", "uri":"drs_11_0070.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"251" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"264" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2264,8 +2381,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Names of the Source and Destination Databases Are the Same", "uri":"drs_11_0004.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"251", - "code":"252" + "p_code":"264", + "code":"265" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2273,8 +2390,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the Destination Database Contains a Non-Empty Collection with the Same Name As the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0043.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"251", - "code":"253" + "p_code":"264", + "code":"266" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2282,8 +2399,8 @@ "title":"SSL Connections", "uri":"drs_11_0071.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"254" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"267" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2291,8 +2408,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Correctly Configured", "uri":"drs_11_0017.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"254", - "code":"255" + "p_code":"267", + "code":"268" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2300,8 +2417,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SSL Connection Is Enabled for the Source Database", "uri":"drs_11_0042.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"254", - "code":"256" + "p_code":"267", + "code":"269" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2309,8 +2426,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether the SSL Certificate of the Destination Database Exists", "uri":"drs_11_0107.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"254", - "code":"257" + "p_code":"267", + "code":"270" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2318,8 +2435,8 @@ "title":"Object Dependencies", "uri":"drs_11_0220.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"181", - "code":"258" + "p_code":"190", + "code":"271" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2327,8 +2444,8 @@ "title":"Checking Whether Referenced Tables Are Selected for Migration", "uri":"drs_11_0222.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"258", - "code":"259" + "p_code":"271", + "code":"272" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2336,8 +2453,8 @@ "title":"Failure Cases", "uri":"drs_02_0488.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"180", - "code":"260" + "p_code":"189", + "code":"273" }, { "desc":"When you migrate full backups from self-built OBS buckets to clouds, the following error message is displayed: restore:null.The possible causes are as follows:Backup file", @@ -2345,8 +2462,8 @@ "title":"Backup Migration Failed Because Backup Files Cannot Be Found", "uri":"drs_13_0002.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"260", - "code":"261" + "p_code":"273", + "code":"274" }, { "desc":"When you migrate full backups from self-built OBS buckets to clouds, the system displays an error message indicating that the migration failed because the source database", @@ -2354,8 +2471,8 @@ "title":"Backup Migration Failed Because a Backup Database Cannot Be Found in the Backup Files", "uri":"drs_13_0005.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", - "p_code":"260", - "code":"262" + "p_code":"273", + "code":"275" }, { "desc":"HUAWEI CLOUD Help Center presents technical documents to help you quickly get started with HUAWEI CLOUD services. The technical documents include Service Overview, Price Details, Purchase Guide, User Guide, API Reference, Best Practices, FAQs, and Videos.", @@ -2364,6 +2481,6 @@ "uri":"drs_change_history.html", "doc_type":"usermanual", "p_code":"", - "code":"263" + "code":"276" } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0004.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0004.html index 267961e1..c6ca137a 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0004.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0004.html @@ -13,8 +13,8 @@

Supported network types during migration to GaussDB(for MySQL) on the current cloud:

-

GaussDB(for openGauss)

DRS can migrate data from your databases to GaussDB(for openGauss) on the current cloud. For more information about GaussDB(for openGauss), see GaussDB(for openGauss) User Guide.

-

Supported network types during migration to GaussDB(for openGauss) on the current cloud:

+

GaussDB

DRS can migrate data from your databases to GaussDB on the current cloud. For more information about GaussDB, see GaussDB User Guide.

+

Supported network types during migration to GaussDB on the current cloud:

diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0005.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0005.html index cac1a46a..20846108 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0005.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0005.html @@ -24,10 +24,10 @@

Region and AZ

A region and availability zone (AZ) identify the location of a data center. You can create resources in a specific region and AZ.

Figure 1 shows the relationship between regions and AZs.

-
Figure 1 Region and AZ
+
Figure 1 Region and AZ

Project

A project corresponds to a region. Projects group and isolate resources (including compute, storage, and network resources) across physical regions. Users can be granted permissions in a default project to access all resources in the region associated with the project. If you need more refined access control, create subprojects under a default project and create resources in subprojects. Then you can assign users the permissions required to access only the resources in the specific subprojects.

-
Figure 2 Project isolating model
+
Figure 2 Project isolating model

Account Entrustment

DRS will entrust your account to the administrator to implement some functions. For example, if you enable scheduled startup tasks, DRS will automatically entrust your account to DRS administrator op_svc_rds during the task creation to implement automated management on the scheduled tasks.

Account entrustment can be implemented in the same region only.

diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0021.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0021.html index 7d4ecabb..a4ccf405 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0021.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0021.html @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@

Prerequisites

To begin using DRS, register an account on the official website. When the registration is successful, you can access all cloud services, including DRS and RDS.

If you have registered an account, you can log in to the management console and access your DRS.

-

Procedure

  1. Log in to the management console.
  2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and project.
  3. Log in to the management console, click Data Replication Service under Databases to go to the DRS console.
+

Procedure

  1. Log in to the management console.
  2. Click in the upper left corner and select a region and project.
  3. Log in to the management console, click Data Replication Service under Databases to go to the DRS console.
diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0301.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0301.html index 8a56072c..b34762da 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0301.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0301.html @@ -27,6 +27,18 @@
  • Single DB instance
  • Primary/Standby DB instance
+

To the cloud

+ +

MySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby

+ +
  • On-premises databases
+
  • ECS databases
  • Databases on other clouds
  • RDS MySQL DB instances
  • GaussDB(for MySQL) instances
+ +

GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby

+ +
  • Primary/Standby DB instance
+ +

To the cloud

MongoDB->DDS

@@ -99,11 +111,18 @@

MongoDB->DDS

-
  • MongoDB 3.2.x
  • MongoDB 3.4.x
  • MongoDB 4.0.x
+
  • MongoDB 3.2.x
  • MongoDB 3.4.x
  • MongoDB 3.6.x
  • MongoDB 4.0.x
  • MongoDB 4.2.x
  • MongoDB 4.4.x
-
  • DDS 3.2.x
  • DDS 3.4.x
  • DDS 4.0.x
  • DDS 4.2.x
    NOTE:

    If the destination database version is 4.2, the source database version cannot be later than 4.0.

    -
    -
+
  • DDS 3.2.x
  • DDS 3.4.x
  • DDS 4.0.x
  • DDS 4.2.x
  • DDS 4.4.x
+ + +

To the cloud

+ +

MySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby

+ +
  • MySQL 5.6.x
  • MySQL 5.7.x
  • MySQL 8.0.x
+ +

GaussDB(for MySQL)-MySQL 8.0

From the cloud

@@ -119,9 +138,9 @@

DDS->MongoDB

-
  • DDS 3.2.x
  • DDS 3.4.x
  • DDS 4.0.x
+
  • DDS 3.2.x
  • DDS 3.4.x
  • DDS 4.0.x
  • DDS 4.2.x
  • DDS 4.4.x
-
  • MongoDB 3.2.x
  • MongoDB 3.4.x
  • MongoDB 4.0.x
+
  • MongoDB 3.2.x
  • MongoDB 3.4.x
  • MongoDB 3.6.x
  • MongoDB 4.0.x
  • MongoDB 4.2.x
  • MongoDB 4.4.x

Self-built -> Self-built

@@ -160,6 +179,15 @@

Supported

+

To the cloud

+ +

MySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

To the cloud

MongoDB->DDS

@@ -167,7 +195,8 @@
  • Replica set -> Single node
  • Replica set -> Replica set
  • Replica set -> Cluster
  • Single node -> Single node
  • Single node -> Replica set
  • Single node -> Cluster
  • Cluster -> Cluster
  • Replica set -> Single node
  • Replica set -> Replica set
  • Replica set -> Cluster
  • Single node -> Single node
  • Single node -> Replica set
  • Single node -> Cluster
-
NOTE:
  • If you need to perform an incremental migration for a single-node instance, the source database must be the DDS single-node instance.
  • The source database cannot be a GaussDB(for Mongo) instance.
+
NOTE:

If you need to perform an incremental migration for a single-node instance, the source database must be the DDS single-node instance.

+
@@ -274,6 +303,17 @@

Supported

+

To the cloud

+ +

MySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

To the cloud

MongoDB->DDS

@@ -347,6 +387,17 @@

Supported

+

To the cloud

+ +

MySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

To the cloud

MongoDB->DDS

diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0302.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0302.html index 602225c4..1f617be5 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0302.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0302.html @@ -29,11 +29,11 @@

To the cloud

-

MySQL-> GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed

+

MySQL-> GaussDB distributed

  • On-premises databases
  • ECS databases
  • Databases on other clouds
  • RDS MySQL DB instances
-

GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed

+

GaussDB distributed

  • Cluster
@@ -60,6 +60,17 @@
  • Single DB instance
  • Primary/Standby DB instance
+

To the cloud

+ +

Oracle->PostgreSQL

+ +
  • On-premises databases
  • ECS databases
+ +

RDS PostgreSQL DB instances

+ +
  • Single DB instance
  • Primary/Standby DB instance
+ +

From the cloud

MySQL->MySQL

@@ -71,11 +82,22 @@

-

+

From the cloud

+ +

MySQL->Kafka

+ +

RDS MySQL DB instances

+ +
  • Kafka
  • DMS for Kafka
+ +
  • Cluster
  • Single node
+ +

From the cloud

-

GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed -> MySQL

+

GaussDB distributed -> MySQL

-

GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed

+

GaussDB distributed

  • On-premises databases
  • ECS databases
  • Databases on other clouds
  • RDS MySQL instances
@@ -93,6 +115,17 @@
  • Single DB instance
  • Primary/Standby DB instance
+

Self-built -> Self-built

+ +

MySQL->Kafka

+ +
  • On-premises databases
  • ECS databases
+ +
  • Kafka
  • DMS for Kafka
+ +
  • Cluster
  • Single node
+ +
@@ -131,7 +164,7 @@

To the cloud

-

MySQL-> GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed

+

MySQL-> GaussDB distributed

Not supported

@@ -168,6 +201,19 @@

One-way sync

+

To the cloud

+ +

Oracle->PostgreSQL

+ +

Not supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

One-way sync

+ +

From the cloud

MySQL->MySQL

@@ -181,9 +227,22 @@

One-way sync

+

From the cloud

+ +

MySQL->Kafka

+ +

Supported

+ +

Not supported

+ +

Not supported

+ +

One-way sync

+ +

From the cloud

-

GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed -> MySQL

+

GaussDB distributed -> MySQL

Supported

@@ -207,6 +266,19 @@

One-way sync

+

Self-built -> Self-built

+ +

MySQL->Kafka

+ +

Supported

+ +

Not supported

+ +

Not supported

+ +

One-way sync

+ +
@@ -235,11 +307,11 @@

To the cloud

-

MySQL-> GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed

+

MySQL-> GaussDB distributed

  • MySQL 5.5.x
  • MySQL 5.6.x
  • MySQL 5.7.x
-
  • GaussDB(for openGauss) 1.0.0 or later
+
  • GaussDB 1.0.0 or later

To the cloud

@@ -255,13 +327,20 @@

PostgreSQL->PostgreSQL

-
  • PostgreSQL 9.4.x
  • PostgreSQL 9.5.x
  • PostgreSQL 9.6.x
  • PostgreSQL 10.x
  • PostgreSQL 11.x
  • PostgreSQL 12.x
  • PostgreSQL 13.x
    NOTE:

    If the source DB type is RDS PostgreSQL Enhanced Edition, the destination DB type must be the same.

    -
    -
+
  • PostgreSQL 9.4.x
  • PostgreSQL 9.5.x
  • PostgreSQL 9.6.x
  • PostgreSQL 10.x
  • PostgreSQL 11.x
  • PostgreSQL 12.x
  • PostgreSQL 13.x
  • PostgreSQL 9.5.x
  • PostgreSQL 9.6.x
  • PostgreSQL 10.x
  • PostgreSQL 11.x
  • PostgreSQL 12.x
  • PostgreSQL 13.x
+

To the cloud

+ +

Oracle->PostgreSQL

+ +
  • Oracle 10g
  • Oracle 11g
  • Oracle 12c
  • Oracle 18c
  • Oracle 19c
+ +
  • PostgreSQL 9.5.x
  • PostgreSQL 9.6.x
  • PostgreSQL 10.x
  • PostgreSQL 11.x
  • PostgreSQL 12.x
+ +

From the cloud

MySQL->MySQL

@@ -271,11 +350,20 @@
  • MySQL 5.6.x
  • MySQL 5.7.x
  • MySQL 8.0.x
+

From the cloud

+ +

MySQL->Kafka

+ +
  • MySQL 5.6.x
  • MySQL 5.7.x
+ +

Kafka 0.11 or later

+ +

From the cloud

-

GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed -> MySQL

+

GaussDB distributed -> MySQL

-

GaussDB(for openGauss)1.3

+

GaussDB 1.3

  • MySQL 5.5.x
  • MySQL 5.6.x
  • MySQL 5.7.x
@@ -289,6 +377,15 @@
  • MySQL 5.6.x
  • MySQL 5.7.x
  • MySQL 8.0.x
+

Self-built -> Self-built

+ +

MySQL->Kafka

+ +
  • MySQL 5.5.x
  • MySQL 5.6.x
  • MySQL 5.7.x
  • MySQL 8.0.x
+ +

Kafka 0.11 or later

+ +
@@ -365,7 +462,7 @@

To the cloud

-

MySQL-> GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed

+

MySQL-> GaussDB distributed

Supported

@@ -396,6 +493,17 @@

Supported

+

To the cloud

+ +

Oracle->PostgreSQL

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

From the cloud

MySQL->MySQL

@@ -407,9 +515,20 @@

Supported

+

From the cloud

+ +

MySQL->Kafka

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

From the cloud

-

GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed -> MySQL

+

GaussDB distributed -> MySQL

Not supported

@@ -429,99 +548,143 @@

Supported

+

Self-built -> Self-built

+ +

MySQL->Kafka

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported

+ +

Supported Synchronization Objects

DRS allows you to synchronize different objects. The following table lists the supported objects.

-
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@

  • On the Confirm Task page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

    • Set Start Time to Start upon task creation or Start at a specified time based on site requirements.
    • After a migration task is started, the performance of the source and destination databases may be affected. You are advised to start a migration task during off-peak hours.
    • Under specific conditions, the destination database needs to be restarted once during the task startup, which may interrupt database services.
    -

  • After the task is submitted, view and manage it on the Online Migration Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
    +

  • After the task is submitted, view and manage it on the Online Migration Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.

    • Method 2

    1. On the Online Migration Management page, click the target migration task name in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. On the displayed page, click edit this task to go to the Configure Source and Destination Databases page.
    3. Perform steps 2 to 6.
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0026.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0026.html index 4f63693f..3aec47e4 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0026.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0026.html @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
    Table 6 Supported synchronization objects

    Synchronization Direction

    +
    - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0326.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0326.html index ec53b9f2..feeb0951 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0326.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0326.html @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -

    MySQL->GaussDB(for openGauss)

    +

    MySQL->GaussDB

    Table 6 Supported synchronization objects

    Synchronization Direction

    Data Flow

    +

    Data Flow

    Table-level

    +

    Table-level

    Database-level

    +

    Database-level

    Importing an Object File

    +

    Importing an Object File

    To the cloud

    +

    To the cloud

    MySQL->MySQL

    +

    MySQL->MySQL

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    To the cloud

    +

    To the cloud

    MySQL-> GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed

    +

    MySQL-> GaussDB distributed

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Not supported

    +

    Not supported

    Not supported

    +

    Not supported

    To the cloud

    +

    To the cloud

    MySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby

    +

    MySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    To the cloud

    +

    To the cloud

    PostgreSQL->PostgreSQL

    +

    PostgreSQL->PostgreSQL

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    From the cloud

    +

    To the cloud

    MySQL->MySQL

    +

    Oracle->PostgreSQL

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Supported

    +

    Not supported

    Not supported

    +

    Supported

    From the cloud

    +

    From the cloud

    GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed -> MySQL

    +

    MySQL->MySQL

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Not supported

    +

    Supported

    Not supported

    +

    Not supported

    Self-built -> Self-built

    +

    From the cloud

    MySQL->MySQL

    +

    MySQL->Kafka

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    Not supported

    +

    Supported

    +

    From the cloud

    +

    GaussDB distributed -> MySQL

    +

    Supported

    +

    Not supported

    +

    Not supported

    +

    Self-built -> Self-built

    +

    MySQL->MySQL

    +

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    +

    Not supported

    +

    Self-built -> Self-built

    +

    MySQL->Kafka

    +

    Supported

    +

    Supported

    +

    Supported
    - @@ -198,8 +198,8 @@
    • DATE values supported by MySQL range from '1000-01-01' to '9999-12-31'.

      DATETIME values supported by MySQL range from '1000-01-01 00:00:00' to '9999-12-31 23:59:59'.

      TIMESTAMP values supported by MySQL range from '1970-01-01 00:00:01' UTC to '2038-01-19 03:14:07' UTC.

      For details, see official MySQL documentation.

      -

      For GaussDB(or openGauss), 0000-00-00 is an invalid date and will be converted to 1970-01-01 by DRS. For example, '0000-00-00' of the DATE type in MySQL is converted to '1970-01-01' by DRS, and '1000-00-31 23:59:59' of the DATETIME or TIMESTAMP type in MySQL is converted to '1970-01-01 00:00:00' by DRS.

      -
    • TIME values supported by MySQL range from '-838:59:59' to '838:59:59'. For details, see the official MySQL documentation. For GaussDB(for openGauss), the minimum value of the TIME type is 00:00:00 and the maximum value is 24:00:00. In MySQL, if a value of the TIME type is less than 00:00:00 or greater than 24:00:00, DRS will convert it to 00:00:00.
    • YEAR value ranges supported by MySQL are 1901 to 2155 and 0000. For details, see official MySQL documentation. GaussDB(for openGauss) does not have the YEAR type, so DRS will convert the YEAR type of MySQL to the SMALLINT type.
    • For MySQL databases, '0000' of the DATE type will be converted to 0 by DRS.
    +

    For GaussDB, 0000-00-00 is an invalid date and will be converted to 1970-01-01 by DRS. For example, '0000-00-00' of the DATE type in MySQL is converted to '1970-01-01' by DRS, and '1000-00-31 23:59:59' of the DATETIME or TIMESTAMP type in MySQL is converted to '1970-01-01 00:00:00' by DRS.

    +
  • TIME values supported by MySQL range from '-838:59:59' to '838:59:59'. For details, see the official MySQL documentation. For GaussDB, the minimum value of the TIME type is 00:00:00 and the maximum value is 24:00:00. In MySQL, if a value of the TIME type is less than 00:00:00 or greater than 24:00:00, DRS will convert it to 00:00:00.
  • YEAR value ranges supported by MySQL are 1901 to 2155 and 0000. For details, see official MySQL documentation. GaussDB does not have the YEAR type, so DRS will convert the YEAR type of MySQL to the SMALLINT type.
  • For MySQL databases, '0000' of the DATE type will be converted to 0 by DRS.
    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0334.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0334.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce7331a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0334.html @@ -0,0 +1,205 @@ + + +

    Oracle->PostgreSQL

    +

    Oracle -> PostgreSQL Community Edition

    +
    Table 1 Data type mapping

    Data Type (MySQL)

    Data Type (GaussDB(for openGauss))

    +

    Data Type (GaussDB)

    Whether to Support Mapping
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Data type mapping

    Data Type (Oracle)

    +

    Data Type (PostgreSQL Community Edition)

    +

    Whether to Support Mapping

    +

    CHAR

    +

    CHAR

    +

    Yes

    +

    VARCHAR

    +

    VARCHAR

    +

    Yes

    +

    VARCHAR2

    +

    VARCHAR

    +

    Yes

    +

    NCHAR

    +

    NCHAR

    +

    Yes

    +

    NVARCHAR2

    +

    NVARCHAR

    +

    Yes

    +

    NUMBER

    +

    NUMBER

    +

    Yes

    +

    BINARY_FLOAT

    +

    FLOAT

    +

    Yes

    +

    BINARY_DOUBLE

    +

    DOUBLE

    +

    Yes

    +

    FLOAT

    +

    FLOAT

    +

    Yes

    +

    DATE

    +

    TIMESTAMP

    +

    Yes

    +

    TIMESTAMP

    +

    TIMESTAMP

    +

    Yes

    +

    TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE

    +

    TIMESTAMPTZ

    +

    Yes

    +

    TIMESTAMP WITH LOCAL TIME ZONE

    +

    TIMESTAMPTZ

    +

    Yes

    +

    INTERVAL

    +

    INTERVAL

    +

    Yes

    +

    BLOB

    +

    BYTEA

    +

    Yes

    +

    CLOB

    +

    CLOB

    +

    Yes

    +

    NCLOB

    +

    TEXT

    +

    Yes

    +

    LONG

    +

    TEXT

    +

    Yes

    +

    LONG_RAW

    +

    BYTEA

    +

    Yes

    +

    RAW (non-primary key and non-unique key column)

    +

    BYTEA

    +

    Yes

    +

    RAW (primary key and unique key column)

    +

    VARCHAR

    +

    Yes

    +

    ROWID

    +

    CHAR

    +

    Yes

    +

    UROWID

    +

    -

    +

    No

    +

    XMLTYPE

    +

    -

    +

    No

    +

    BFILE

    +

    -

    +

    No

    +

    SDO_GEOMETRY

    +

    -

    +

    No

    +
    +
    + + +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: Mapping Data Types
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0337.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0337.html index c842b88d..5df36930 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0337.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_01_0337.html @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -

    GaussDB(for openGauss)->MySQL

    +

    GaussDB->MySQL

    -
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0027.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0027.html index 2bc8c870..436944fc 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0027.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0027.html @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@

    A complete online disaster recovery consists of creating a DR task, tracking task progress, analyzing DR logs, and comparing data consistency. By comparing multiple items and data, you can synchronize data between different service systems.

    Process

    The following flowchart shows the basic processes for disaster recovery.

    -
    Figure 1 Disaster recovery process
    +
    Figure 1 Disaster recovery process

    This section uses disaster recovery from a MySQL instance to an RDS MySQL instance as an example describes how to configure a DR task on the DRS console over a public network.

    You can create a DR task that will walk you through each step of the process. After a DR task is created, you can manage it on the DRS console.

    @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@
    • Yes

      You can customize the maximum DR speed.

      In addition, you can set the time range based on your service requirements. The traffic rate setting usually includes setting of a rate limiting time period and a traffic rate value. Flow can be controlled all day or during specific time ranges. The default value is All day. A maximum of three time ranges can be set, and they cannot overlap.

      The flow rate must be set based on the service scenario and cannot exceed 9,999 MB/s.

      -
      Figure 2 Flow control
      +
      Figure 2 Flow control
    • No
      The DR speed is not limited and the outbound bandwidth of the source database is maximally used, which causes read consumption on the source database accordingly. For example, if the outbound bandwidth of the source database is 100 MB/s and 80% bandwidth is used, the I/O consumption on the source database is 80 MB/s.
      NOTE:
      • Flow control mode takes effect during the initial DR phase only.
      • You can also change the flow control mode when the task is in the Configuration state. On the Basic Information tab, In the DR Information area, click Modify next to Flow Control. In the dialog box that is displayed, change the flow control mode. The flow control mode cannot be changed for a task that is in Starting state.
      @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@
    Table 1 Data type mapping

    Data Type (GaussDB(for openGauss))

    +
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0002.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0002.html index 9bf9c3e5..1b343fe5 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0002.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0002.html @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@

    Step 1: Create a Migration Task

    Process

    A complete real-time migration consists of creating a migration task, tracking task progress, analyzing migration logs, and comparing data consistency. By comparing multiple items and data, you can determine the proper time for service migration to minimize the service downtime.

    A complete migration involves the following procedures.

    -
    Figure 1 Migration process
    +
    Figure 1 Migration process

    This section uses the migration from MySQL to RDS MySQL as an example to describe how to configure a migration task over a VPC network on the DRS console.

    VPC is suitable for migrations of cloud databases in the same region.

    @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@
    @@ -265,10 +265,10 @@ @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@
    Table 1 Data type mapping

    Data Type (GaussDB)

    Data Type (MySQL)

    SSL Connection

    SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

    -
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If the SSL certificate is not used, your data may be at risk.
    +
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If SSL is disabled, your data may be at risk.

    Migrate Account

    During a database migration, accounts need to be migrated separately.

    -
    There are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts whose permissions need to be reduced, and accounts that cannot be migrated. You can choose whether to migrate the accounts based on service requirements. If you select Yes, you can select the accounts to be migrated as required.
    • Yes

      If you need to migrate accounts, see Migrating Accounts.

      +
      There are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts whose permissions need to be reduced, and accounts that cannot be migrated. You can choose whether to migrate the accounts based on service requirements. If you select Yes, you can select the accounts to be migrated as required.
      -
      • No

        During migration, accounts, permissions, and passwords are not migrated.

        +
        • No

          During migration, accounts, permissions, and passwords are not migrated.

    You can choose to migrate all objects, tables, or databases based on your service requirements.

    • All: All objects in the source database are migrated to the destination database. After the migration, the object names will remain the same as those in the source database and cannot be modified.
    • Tables: The selected table-level objects will be migrated.
    • Databases: The selected database-level objects will be migrated.
    -

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    +

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    -

  • After the task is submitted, view and manage it on the Online Migration Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper right corner to view the latest task status.
    +

  • After the task is submitted, view and manage it on the Online Migration Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper right corner to view the latest task status.

    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0007.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0007.html index 8c57d284..9d2bc5c5 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0007.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0007.html @@ -2,10 +2,10 @@

    Step 4: Compare Migration Items

    This section describes how to compare migration items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. By comparing migration objects, you can determine the proper time for service migration to minimize the service downtime.

    -
    Figure 1 Comparison process
    +
    Figure 1 Comparison process

    Comparison Scenarios

    You can compare migration objects with different dimensions:

    • Object-level comparison: It helps you compare databases, indexes, tables, views, stored procedures and functions, and sorting rules of tables. You are advised to perform the comparison after a full migration is complete.
    • Data-level comparison is classified into row comparison and value comparison.
      • Row comparison: It helps you compare the number of rows in the tables to be migrated. This comparison method is recommended because it is fast.
      • Value comparison: It helps you check whether data in the migrated table is consistent. The comparison process is relatively slow.
      -
    +
  • Account comparison: It compares usernames and permissions of the source and destination databases.
  • Periodic comparison: DRS periodically compares the number of rows or objects in the source database table with those in the destination database table and displays the comparison results. To compare rows or objects periodically, enable comparison policy.

    • When you check data consistency, compare the number of rows first. If the number of rows are inconsistent, you can then compare the data in the table to determine the inconsistent data.

    Comparison Restrictions

    • A comparison task can be created only when the task is in the incremental phase. When a full task is complete, DRS automatically creates object-level and row comparison tasks.
    • If DDL operations were performed on the source database, you need to compare the objects again to ensure the accuracy of the comparison results.
    • If data in the destination database is modified separately, the comparison results may be inconsistent.
    • Currently, only tables with primary keys support value comparison. For tables that do not support value comparison, you can compare rows. Therefore, you can compare data by row or value based on scenarios.
    • To prevent resources from being occupied for a long time, DRS limits the row comparison duration. If the row comparison duration exceeds the threshold, the row comparison task stops automatically. If the source database is a relational database, the row comparison duration is 60 minutes. If the source database is a non-relational database, for example, MongoDB, the row comparison duration is 30 minutes.
    @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
    1. On the Online Migration Management page, click the target migration task name in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. On the Migration Comparison tab, compare objects of the source and destination databases.

      1. Check the integrity of the database object.

        Click Validate Objects. On the Object-Level Comparison tab, view the comparison result of each comparison item.

        Locate a comparison item you want to view and click View Details in the Operation column.

      2. After the check is complete, compare the number of rows and values.
        1. In the Before You Start pane, click Validate All Rows/Values.
        2. In the displayed Create Comparison Task dialog box, specify Comparison Type, Comparison Time, and Object. Then, click OK.
          • Comparison Type: compares rows and values.
          • Comparison Time: You can select Start upon task creation or Start at a specified time. There is a slight difference in time between the source and destination databases during synchronization. Data inconsistency may occur. You are advised to compare migration items during off-peak hours for more accurate results.
          • Object: You can select objects to be compared based on the scenarios.
          -

          After the comparison creation task is submitted, the Data-Level Comparison tab is displayed. Click to refresh the list and view the comparison result of the specified comparison type.

          +

          After the comparison creation task is submitted, the Data-Level Comparison tab is displayed. Click to refresh the list and view the comparison result of the specified comparison type.

          To view the comparison details, locate the target comparison type and click View Results in the Operation column. On the displayed page, locate a pair of source and destination databases, and click View Details in the Operation column to view detailed comparison results.

          You can cancel a running task at any time and view the comparison report of a canceled comparison task.

          @@ -33,6 +33,12 @@

    +

    Periodic Comparison

    Periodic comparison indicates that DRS periodically compares the number of rows or objects in the source database table with those in the destination database table and displays the comparison results.

    +
    1. On the Online Migration Management page, click the target migration task name in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. Choose Migration Comparison.
    3. Click the Periodic Comparison tab and click Modify Comparison Policy.
    4. In the Modify Comparison Policy dialog box, enable periodic comparison, specify the comparison frequency, time interval, effective time and comparison type, and click Yes.

      • After periodic comparison is enabled, DRS compares the number of rows or objects at the scheduled time. You can view the comparison results on the Data-Level Comparison or Object-Level Comparison tab.
      • After periodic comparison is disabled, only historical comparison results can be viewed.
      • Modifications to the comparison policy settings take effect from the next comparison and do not affect the on-going periodic comparison tasks.
      • During periodic comparison, the source and destination databases will be read. Perform the comparison during off-peak hours.
      • During periodic comparison, ultra-large tables (those with more than 100 million rows) are automatically filtered out. You can use data-level comparison to spot check such large tables. It is not recommended that these large tables be compared periodically.
      +
      +

      +

    +

    Quick Comparison

    To accelerate and simplify the migration process, DRS provides the quick comparison function. You can directly perform a comparison on the migration task list. This function can be used to compare all migration objects only when incremental migration tasks are in progress.

    1. On the Online Migration Management page, locate the target migration task and click Compare in the Operation column.
    2. On the Create Comparison Task page, select Start upon task creation or Start at a specified time and click Yes to start the comparison task.
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0009.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0009.html index 9555f17e..7069d384 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0009.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0009.html @@ -9,10 +9,10 @@

    On-premises and other cloud's Microsoft SQL Server backup file versions:

    -
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2000
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2005
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2008
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2012
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2014
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2016
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2017
    +
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2000
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2005
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2008
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2012
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2014
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2016
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2017
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2019

    RDS for Microsoft SQL Server

    -
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2008
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2012
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2014
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2016
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2017
    +
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2008
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2012
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2014
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2016
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2017
    • Microsoft SQL Server 2019
    -

  • After the DR task is submitted, view and manage it on the Disaster Recovery Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
    +

  • After the DR task is submitted, view and manage it on the Disaster Recovery Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.

    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0033.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0033.html index 010ef59d..7e15547c 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0033.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0033.html @@ -15,13 +15,13 @@

    Prerequisites

    • You have logged in to the DRS console.
    • A DR task has been started.
    -

    Procedure

    1. On the Disaster Recovery Management page, click the target DR task in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. On the Disaster Recovery Comparison tab, compare the service and DR databases.

      1. Check the integrity of the database object.

        Click Validate Objects. On the Object-Level Comparison tab, click Compare. Wait for a while and click , and view the comparison result of each comparison item.

        +

        Procedure

        1. On the Disaster Recovery Management page, click the target DR task in the Task Name/ID column.
        2. On the Disaster Recovery Comparison tab, compare the service and DR databases.

          1. Check the integrity of the database object.

            Click Validate Objects. On the Object-Level Comparison tab, click Compare. Wait for a while and click , and view the comparison result of each comparison item.

            Locate a comparison item you want to view and click View Details in the Operation column.

          2. After the check is complete, compare the number of rows and values.

            On the Data-Level Comparison tab, click Create Comparison Task. In the displayed dialog box, specify Comparison Type, Comparison Time, and Object. Then, click OK.

            • Comparison Type: compares rows and values.
            • Comparison Time: You can select Start upon task creation or Start at a specified time. There is a slight difference in time between the source and destination databases during synchronization. Data inconsistency may occur. You are advised to compare migration items during off-peak hours for more accurate results.
            • Object: You can select objects to be compared based on the scenarios.
            • Data-level comparison cannot be performed for tasks in initialization.
            -
          3. After the comparison creation task is submitted, the Data-Level Comparison tab is displayed. Click to refresh the list and view the comparison result of the specified comparison type.
          4. To view the comparison details, locate the target comparison type and click View Results in the Operation column. On the displayed page, locate a pair of service and DR databases, and click View Details in the Operation column to view detailed comparison results.

            You can also view comparison details of canceled comparison tasks.

            +
          5. After the comparison creation task is submitted, the Data-Level Comparison tab is displayed. Click to refresh the list and view the comparison result of the specified comparison type.
          6. To view the comparison details, locate the target comparison type and click View Results in the Operation column. On the displayed page, locate a pair of service and DR databases, and click View Details in the Operation column to view detailed comparison results.

            You can also view comparison details of canceled comparison tasks.

        diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0100.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0100.html index 63a810e9..28157f85 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0100.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_02_0100.html @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@

        Before data migration, ensure that network preparations and security rule settings are complete. If the connection is abnormal, check whether the network configuration is correct.

        This section uses the migration from MySQL to RDS MySQL as an example to describe three migration scenarios: cross-cloud real-time migration, on-premises database migration, and real-time migration of self-built ECS databases.

        Cross-Cloud Real-Time Migration

        1. Network settings
          Enable public accessibility for the source database.
          • Source database network settings:

            Enable public accessibility for the source database.

            -

            For details, see related documents provided by Alibaba Cloud.

            +

            For details, see related documents provided by other Cloud.

          • Destination database network settings:

            By default, the destination database and the DRS replication instance are in the same VPC and can communicate with each other. No further configuration is required.

          diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0002.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0002.html index e3335961..94167bcf 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0002.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0002.html @@ -29,10 +29,10 @@

    Migrate Account

    During a database migration, accounts need to be migrated separately.

    -
    There are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts whose permissions need to be reduced, and accounts that cannot be migrated. You can choose whether to migrate the accounts based on service requirements. If you select Yes, you can select the accounts to be migrated as required.
    • Yes

      If you need to migrate accounts, see Migrating Accounts.

      +
      There are accounts that can be migrated completely, accounts whose permissions need to be reduced, and accounts that cannot be migrated. You can choose whether to migrate the accounts based on service requirements. If you select Yes, you can select the accounts to be migrated as required.
      -
      • No

        During migration, accounts, permissions, and passwords are not migrated.

        +
        • No

          During migration, accounts, permissions, and passwords are not migrated.

    You can choose to migrate all objects, tables, or databases based on your service requirements.

    • All: All objects in the source database are migrated to the destination database. After the migration, the object names will remain the same as those in the source database and cannot be modified.
    • Tables: The selected table-level objects will be migrated.
    • Databases: The selected database-level objects will be migrated.
    -

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    +

    If the source database is changed, click in the upper right corner before selecting migration objects to ensure that the objects to be selected are from the changed source database.

    NOTE:
    • If you choose not to migrate all of the databases, the migration may fail because the objects, such as stored procedures and views, in the databases to be migrated may have dependencies on other objects that are not migrated. To prevent migration failure, migrate all of the databases.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected migration object cannot contain spaces.
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    -

  • After the DR task is submitted, view and manage it on the Disaster Recovery Management page.

    +

  • After the DR task is submitted, view and manage it on the Disaster Recovery Management page.

    • Method 2

    1. On the Disaster Recovery Management page, click the target DR task in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. On the displayed page, click edit this task to go to the Configure Source and Destination Databases page.
    3. Perform 2 through 5 in method 1.
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0035.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0035.html index 1a228efa..bd2de263 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0035.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0035.html @@ -28,9 +28,9 @@

  • Click Confirm.
  • Click Next.
    • -

    Viewing Data Filtering Results

    1. In the task list, click the task to be processed.
    2. Click the Process Data tab to view data filtering records. Click in the upper right corner to refresh the record list.
    +

    Viewing Data Filtering Results

    1. In the task list, click the task to be processed.
    2. Click the Process Data tab to view data filtering records. Click in the upper right corner to refresh the record list.
    -

    View Column Processing

    1. On the task management page, click the target task name in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Synchronization Mapping. In the upper right corner, and select Columns to view column mapping records. Click in the upper right corner to refresh the record list.
    +

    View Column Processing

    1. On the task management page, click the target task name in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. In the navigation pane on the left, choose Synchronization Mapping. In the upper right corner, and select Columns to view column mapping records. Click in the upper right corner to refresh the record list.

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0046.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0046.html index 249a211f..72653422 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0046.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_03_0046.html @@ -2,8 +2,8 @@

    Modifying the Flow Control Mode

    You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration types support this function:

    -
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0101.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0101.html index 9662ceb2..61be2766 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0101.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0101.html @@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ - + -
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0104.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0104.html index efe4091c..83115da7 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0104.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0104.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -

    From MySQL to GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed

    +

    From MySQL to GaussDB Distributed

    Supported Source and Destination Databases

    @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ - @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ - @@ -59,14 +59,14 @@
    Table 1 Supported databases

    Source DB
    • On-premises MySQL databases
    • MySQL databases on an ECS
    • MySQL databases on other clouds
    • RDS for MySQL
    • GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed
    +
    • GaussDB distributed

    Database permissions

    • The source database user must have the following permissions: SELECT, SHOW VIEW, EVENT, LOCK TABLES, REPLICATION SLAVE, and REPLICATION CLIENT.
    • The destination GaussDB(for openGauss) database user must have the following permissions:
      • Database-level permissions: Log in to the postgres base database as user root or other DATABASE users with the Sysadmin role, and grant the CREATE and CONNECT permissions to user DATABASE.
      • Schema-level permission: Log in to the database as user root or user DATABASE with the Sysadmin role, or the owner of the object, and grant the CREATE and USAGE permissions of the schema to the user.
      • Table-level permission: Log in to the database as user root or user DATABASE with the Sysadmin role, or the owner of the object, and grant the SELECT, UPDATE, INSERT, ALTER, INDEX, and DELETE permissions for all tables in the SCHEMA to the user.
      +
    • The source database user must have the following permissions: SELECT, SHOW VIEW, EVENT, LOCK TABLES, REPLICATION SLAVE, and REPLICATION CLIENT.
    • The destination GaussDB database user must have the following permissions:
      • Database-level permissions: Log in to the postgres base database as user root or other DATABASE users with the Sysadmin role, and grant the CREATE and CONNECT permissions to user DATABASE.
      • Schema-level permission: Log in to the database as user root or user DATABASE with the Sysadmin role, or the owner of the object, and grant the CREATE and USAGE permissions of the schema to the user.
      • Table-level permission: Log in to the database as user root or user DATABASE with the Sysadmin role, or the owner of the object, and grant the SELECT, UPDATE, INSERT, ALTER, INDEX, and DELETE permissions for all tables in the SCHEMA to the user.
    • If the network is reconnected within 30 seconds, real-time synchronization will not be affected. If the network is interrupted for more than 30 seconds, the synchronization task will fail.
    • If the character sets of the source and destination databases are different, data may be inconsistent or synchronization may fail.
    • If the data types are incompatible, the synchronization may fail.
    • After a table in the source database is synchronized to the destination database, the table is distributed in hash mode and cannot be replicated.
    • If the source DB instance is an RDS MySQL instance, tables encrypted using Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) cannot be synchronized.
    • If the source MySQL database does not support TLS 1.2 or is a self-built database of an earlier version (earlier than 5.6.46 or between 5.7 and 5.7.28), you need to submit an O&M application for testing the SSL connection.
    • The destination table can contain more columns than the source table. However, the following failures must be avoided:
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination cannot be null or have default values. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will become null, which does not meet the requirements of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
      • Assume that extra columns on the destination must be fixed at a default value and have a unique constraint. If newly inserted data records are synchronized from the source to the destination, the extra columns will contain multiple default values. That does not meet the unique constraint of the destination and will cause the task to fail.
    -
    • The changes to the source database cannot be synchronized to the destination database in multiple tasks at the same time. Otherwise, data inconsistency and synchronization failure may occur.
    • In a full synchronization for the table structure, the length of char, varchar, nvarchar, enum, and set characters in the source database automatically increases by byte in the destination database (because the length of the destination database is in the unit of byte). The increase multiple depends on the character set of columns in the source database. For example, if the character set of the source database is UTF8, increase the length (byte) by three times. If the character set of the source database is UTF8MB4, increase the length (byte) by four times.
    • During an incremental synchronization, do not modify or delete the usernames, passwords, permissions, or ports of the source and destination databases.
    • During an incremental synchronization, DDLs of the source database cannot be replicated.
    • During an incremental synchronization, do not perform the restoration operation on the source database.
    • During task startup or full synchronization, you are not advised to perform DDL operations, such as the deletion operation. Otherwise, the task may fail.
    • Cascade operations cannot be performed on tables with foreign keys. If the foreign key index of a table is a common index, the table structure may fail to be created. You are advised to use a unique index.
    • The source database cannot be restored.
    • The source database does not support the reset master or reset master to command, which may cause DRS task failures or data inconsistency.
    • Do not use an imprecise value type as the primary key in the database. This feature affects the synchronization of UPDATE and DELETE statements in the DRS incremental scenario.
    • If tables without primary keys contain large fields (BLOB, TEXT, CLOB, NCLOB, or BYTEA), data of the large fields may be inconsistent during incremental synchronization.
    • Floating-point data is approximate numbers and depends on the OS platform and underlying implementation. FLOAT and DOUBLE data is inaccurate. If you synchronize floating-point data between MySQL and GaussDB(for openGauss), there may be some differences. For details, see the official MySQL documentation.
    • Two-phase commit is not supported.
    • The ongoing synchronization task cannot be paused.
    • Data processing is not supported.
    • If the source table to be synchronized has the AUTO_INCREMENT attribute, DRS automatically updates the start value of the GaussDB(for openGauss) auto-increment sequence corresponding to the integer sequence of the table when the task is complete. The updated value is the maximum value of the sequence plus 10,000.
    +
    • The changes to the source database cannot be synchronized to the destination database in multiple tasks at the same time. Otherwise, data inconsistency and synchronization failure may occur.
    • In a full synchronization for the table structure, the length of char, varchar, nvarchar, enum, and set characters in the source database automatically increases by byte in the destination database (because the length of the destination database is in the unit of byte). The increase multiple depends on the character set of columns in the source database. For example, if the character set of the source database is UTF8, increase the length (byte) by three times. If the character set of the source database is UTF8MB4, increase the length (byte) by four times.
    • During an incremental synchronization, do not modify or delete the usernames, passwords, permissions, or ports of the source and destination databases.
    • During an incremental synchronization, DDLs of the source database cannot be replicated.
    • During an incremental synchronization, do not perform the restoration operation on the source database.
    • During task startup or full synchronization, you are not advised to perform DDL operations, such as the deletion operation. Otherwise, the task may fail.
    • Cascade operations cannot be performed on tables with foreign keys. If the foreign key index of a table is a common index, the table structure may fail to be created. You are advised to use a unique index.
    • The source database cannot be restored.
    • The source database does not support the reset master or reset master to command, which may cause DRS task failures or data inconsistency.
    • Do not use an imprecise value type as the primary key in the database. This feature affects the synchronization of UPDATE and DELETE statements in the DRS incremental scenario.
    • If tables without primary keys contain large fields (BLOB, TEXT, CLOB, NCLOB, or BYTEA), data of the large fields may be inconsistent during incremental synchronization.
    • Floating-point data is approximate numbers and depends on the OS platform and underlying implementation. FLOAT and DOUBLE data is inaccurate. If you synchronize floating-point data between MySQL and GaussDB, there may be some differences. For details, see the official MySQL documentation.
    • Two-phase commit is not supported.
    • The ongoing synchronization task cannot be paused.
    • Data processing is not supported.
    • If the source table to be synchronized has the AUTO_INCREMENT attribute, DRS automatically updates the start value of the GaussDB auto-increment sequence corresponding to the integer sequence of the table when the task is complete. The updated value is the maximum value of the sequence plus 10,000.
    -

    Procedure

    This section uses real-time synchronization from MySQL to GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed as an example to describe how to configure a real-time synchronization task.

    +

    Procedure

    This section uses real-time synchronization from MySQL to GaussDB distributed as an example to describe how to configure a real-time synchronization task.

    1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click Create Synchronization Task.
    2. On the Create Synchronization Instance page, specify the task name, description, and the synchronization instance details, and click Next.

      - - @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ - @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@
      Table 3 Task and recipient description

      Parameter

      @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@

      Destination DB Engine

      Select GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed Edition.

      +

      Select GaussDB Distributed Edition.

      Network Type

      @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@

      Destination DB Instance

      An available GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed instance.

      +

      An available GaussDB distributed instance.

      Synchronization Instance Subnet

      @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@

      SSL Connection

      SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

      -
      NOTE:
      • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
      • If the SSL certificate is not used, your data may be at risk.
      +
      NOTE:
      • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
      • If SSL is disabled, your data may be at risk.

      DB Instance Name

      The GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed instance selected during synchronization task creation. This parameter cannot be changed.

      +

      The GaussDB distributed instance selected during synchronization task creation. This parameter cannot be changed.

      Database Username

      @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@

      You can synchronize tables based on the service requirements.

      If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

      -
      NOTE:
      • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
      • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
      +
      NOTE:
      • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
      • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
      • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
      • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
      -

    3. After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

      • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
      • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
      +

    4. After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

      • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
      • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0107.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0107.html index 194888f7..a952ba02 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0107.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0107.html @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@

    SSL Connection

    SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

    -
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If the SSL certificate is not used, your data may be at risk.
    +
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If SSL is disabled, your data may be at risk.
    @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@
    • Table-level synchronization: In full synchronization, the inventory data of the selected tables, sequences, views, or materialized views is synchronized. In incremental synchronization, the DML and some DDL statements of the selected tables are synchronized.
    • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

      When a schema name or table name is mapped, to prevent conflicts between indexes and constraint names, the original index name in the table is changed to the following format after synchronization: i_+hash value+original index name (which may be truncated)+_key The hash value is calculated based on the original schema name_original table name_original index name. Similarly, after the synchronization, the original constraint name on the table is changed to c_ + hash value + original constraint name (which may be truncated) + _key.

    -
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    +
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@
    -

  • After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
    +

  • After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.

    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0117.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0117.html index d55c59af..6ffd8078 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0117.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0117.html @@ -220,7 +220,7 @@

    SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

    This parameter is unavailable when the network type is VPC network and the database type is RDS DB instance.

    -
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If the SSL certificate is not used, your data may be at risk.
    +
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If SSL is disabled, your data may be at risk.
    @@ -269,7 +269,7 @@

    Synchronize

    -

    Normal indexes and incremental DDLs can be synchronized. You can determine whether to synchronize data based on service requirements.

    +

    Normal indexes and incremental DDLs can be synchronized. You can determine whether to synchronize data based on service requirements. If you deselect Normal index, DDL statements related to index adding will be filtered out in the incremental phase. If the DDL statements contain other operations, they may also be filtered out.

    Synchronization Object

    @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@

    Select Tables or Databases as required.

    • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

      If the database table name contains characters other than letters, digits, and underscores (_), or the mapped database table name contains hyphens (-) and number signs (#), the name length cannot exceed 42 characters.

    -
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    +
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@
    -

  • After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
    +

  • After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.

    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0118.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0118.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b81c4a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0118.html @@ -0,0 +1,291 @@ + + +

    From MySQL to Kafka

    +

    DMS for Kafka

    +

    Supported Source and Destination Databases

    +
    + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Supported databases

    Source DB

    +

    Destination DB

    +
    • RDS for MySQL
    +
    • Kafka
    • DMS for Kafka
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Prerequisites

    • You have logged in to the DRS console.
    • For details about the DB types and versions supported by real-time synchronization, see Real-Time Synchronization.
    +
    +

    Suggestions

    • The success of database synchronization depends on environment and manual operations. To ensure a smooth synchronization, perform a synchronization trial before you start the synchronization to help you detect and resolve problems in advance.
    • It is recommended that you start a task during off-peak hours to minimize the impact of synchronization on your services.
    +
    +

    Precautions

    Before creating a synchronization task, read the following notes:

    + +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 2 Precautions

    Type

    +

    Restrictions

    +

    Database permissions

    +
    • The source database user must have the following permissions: SELECT, LOCK TABLES, REPLICATION SLAVE, REPLICATION CLIENT, and RELOAD.
    +

    Synchronization object

    +
    • The table data can be synchronized.
    +
    • Tables with storage engine different to MyISAM and InnoDB cannot be synchronized.
    +

    Source database

    +
    • During the incremental synchronization, the binlog of the source MySQL database must be enabled and use the row-based format.
    • If the storage space is sufficient, store the source database binlog for as long as possible. The recommended retention period is three days.
    • If the expire_logs_days value of the source database is set to 0, the synchronization may fail.
    • Enable GTID for the source database. If GTID is not enabled for the source database, primary/standby switchover is not supported. DRS tasks will be interrupted and cannot be restored during a switchover.
    • During an incremental synchronization, the server_id value of the MySQL source database must be set. If the source database version is MySQL 5.6 or earlier, the server_id value ranges from 2 to 4294967296. If the source database is MySQL 5.7 or later, the server_id value ranges from 1 to 4294967296.
    • The database and table names in the source database cannot contain non-ASCII characters, or special characters '<`>/\
    +

    Destination database

    +
    • The destination database is a Kafka database.
    +

    Precautions

    +
    • If the data types are incompatible, the synchronization may fail.
    • If the source DB instance is an RDS MySQL instance, tables encrypted using Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) cannot be synchronized.
    • A real-time synchronization task may fail due to the change of the username and password of the source database. You need to rectify the information and then retry the synchronization task on the DRS console. Generally, you are advised not to modify the preceding information during synchronization.
    • If the source database port is changed during data synchronization, the synchronization task fails. If the destination database port is wrong, DRS automatically changes the port to the correct one, and then you need to retry the synchronization task. Generally, do not modify the port number during synchronization.
    • If a real-time synchronization task fails as the IP address is changed, the system automatically changes the IP address to the correct one. Then, you need to retry the task to continue the synchronization. Therefore, changing the IP address is not recommended.
    • Cascade operations cannot be performed on tables with foreign keys. If the foreign key index of a table is a common index, the table structure may fail to be created. You are advised to use a unique index.
    • The source database does not support point-in-time recovery (PITR).
    • Resumable upload is supported, but data may be repeatedly inserted into a table that does not have a primary key.
    • Binlogs cannot be forcibly deleted. Otherwise, the synchronization task fails.
    • The source database does not support the reset master or reset master to command, which may cause DRS task failures or data inconsistency.
    • Data inconsistency may occur when the MyISAM table is modified during synchronization.
    • During synchronization of table-level objects, renaming tables is not recommended.
    • Set the expire_log_day parameter to a proper value to ensure that the binlog does not expire before data transfer resumes. This ensures that services can be recovered after interruption.
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Procedure

    1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click Create Synchronization Task.
    2. On the Create Synchronization Instance page, specify the task name, description, and the synchronization instance details, and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 3 Task and recipient description

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Region

      +

      The region where the synchronization instance is deployed. You can change the region.

      +

      Project

      +

      The project corresponds to the current region and can be changed.

      +

      Task Name

      +

      The task name must start with a letter and consist of 4 to 50 characters. It can contain only letters, digits, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).

      +

      Description

      +

      The description consists of a maximum of 256 characters and cannot contain special characters !=<>'&"\

      +
      +
      + +
      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 4 Synchronization instance settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Data Flow

      +

      Select Out of the cloud.

      +

      Source DB Engine

      +

      Select MySQL.

      +

      Destination DB Engine

      +

      Select Kafka.

      +

      Network Type

      +

      The Public network is used as an example. Available options: Public network, VPC, VPN or Direct Connect

      +

      Source DB Instance

      +

      The RDS MySQL instance you created.

      +

      Synchronization Instance Subnet

      +

      Select the subnet where the synchronization instance is located. You can also click View Subnet to go to the network console to view the subnet where the instance resides.

      +

      By default, the DRS instance and the destination DB instance are in the same subnet. You need to select the subnet where the DRS instance resides and ensure that there are available IP addresses. To ensure that the synchronization instance is successfully created, only subnets with DHCP enabled are displayed.

      +

      Synchronization Mode

      +
      • Incremental

        Through log parsing, incremental data generated on the source database is synchronized to the destination database.

        +

        During synchronization, the source database continues to provide services for external systems with zero downtime.

        +
      +

      Tags

      +
      • This setting is optional. Adding tags helps you better identify and manage your tasks. Each task can have up to 20 tags.
      • After a task is created, you can view its tag details on the Tags tab. For details, see Tag Management.
      +
      +
      +

      If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. After three days, the task automatically ends.

      +
      +

    3. On the Configure Source and Destination Databases page, wait until the synchronization instance is created. Then, specify source and destination database information and click Test Connection for both the source and destination databases to check whether they have been connected to the synchronization instance. After the connection tests are successful, select the check box before the agreement and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 5 Source database settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      DB Instance Name

      +

      The RDS DB instance selected during synchronization task creation. This parameter cannot be changed.

      +

      Database Username

      +

      The username for accessing the source database.

      +

      Database Password

      +

      The password for the database username.

      +
      +
      +

      The username and password of the source database are encrypted and stored in DRS and will be cleared after the task is deleted.

      +
      + +
      + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 6 Source database information

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      IP Address or Domain Name

      +

      The IP address or domain name of the destination database.

      +

      Security Protocol

      +

      Available options: PLAINTEXT, SSL, SASL_PLAINTEXT, and SASL_SSL. For details, see Kafka Authentication.

      +
      +
      +

    4. On the Set Synchronization Task page, select the synchronization policy, objects, and data format, and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 7 Synchronization Object

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Synchronize DML

      +

      Select the DML operations to be synchronized. By default, all DML operations are selected.

      +

      Topic Synchronization Policy

      +

      Topic synchronization policy. You can select A specific topic or Auto-generated topics.

      +

      Topic

      +

      Select the topic to be synchronized to the destination database. This parameter is available when the topic is set to A specified topic.

      +

      Topic Name Format

      +

      Topic name format. This parameter is available when Topic Synchronization Policy is set to Auto-generated topics.

      +

      Only variables database and tablename are supported. The other characters must be constants. Replace $database$ with the database name and $tablename$ with the table name.

      +

      For example, if this parameter is set to $database$-$tablename$ and the database name is db1, and the table name is tab1, the topic name is db1-tab1. If DDL statements are synchronized, $tablename$ is empty and the topic name is db1.

      +

      Number of Partitions

      +

      This parameter is available when Topic Synchronization Policy is set to Auto-generated topics.

      +

      The number of partitions of a topic. Each topic can have multiple partitions. More partitions can provide higher throughput but consume more resources. Set the number of partitions based on the actual situation of brokers.

      +

      Replication Factor

      +

      This parameter is available when Topic Synchronization Policy is set to Auto-generated topics.

      +

      Number of copies of a topic. Each topic can have multiple copies, and the copies are placed on different brokers in a cluster. The number of copies cannot exceed the number of brokers. Otherwise, the topic fails to be created.

      +

      Synchronize Topic To

      +

      The policy for synchronizing topics to the Kafka partitions.

      +
      • If topics are synchronized to different partitions by hash value of the database and table names, the performance on a single table query can be improved.
      • If topics are synchronized to partition 0, strong consistency can be obtained but write performance is impacted. If you select Partition 0, only automatically created topics can be synchronized.
      • If topics are synchronized to different partitions by hash value of the primary key, one table corresponds to one topic.
      +

      Data Format in Kafka

      +

      Select the data format to be delivered from MySQL to Kafka.

      +
      • JSON: JSON message format, which is easy to interpret but takes up more space.
      • JSON-C: A data format that is compatible with multiple batch and stream computing frameworks.
      +

      For details, see Kafka Message Format.

      +

      Synchronization Object

      +

      Available options: Tables or Databases as required.

      +
      • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.
      +
      NOTE:
      • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
      • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
      +
      • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
      • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
      +
      +
      +
      +

    5. On the Process Data page, select the columns to be processed.

      • If data processing is not required, click Next.
      • If you need to process columns, set processing rules by referring to Processing Data.
      +

    6. On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

      • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
      • If all check items are successful, click Next.

        You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

        +
        +
      +

    7. On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

      +

      + + + + + + + +
      Table 8 Task startup settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Started Time

      +

      Set Start Time to Start upon task creation or Start at a specified time based on site requirements.

      +
      NOTE:

      After a synchronization task is started, the performance of the source and destination databases may be affected. You are advised to start a synchronization task during off-peak hours.

      +
      +
      +
      +

    8. After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

      • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
      • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
      +

    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: Out of the Cloud
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0121.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0121.html index 868e1f86..40f03254 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0121.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0121.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -

    From GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed to MySQL

    +

    From GaussDB Distributed to MySQL

    Supported Source and Destination Databases

    @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ - @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ - @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ - - - @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@
    Table 1 Supported databases

    Source DB
    • GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed
    +
    • GaussDB distributed
    • RDS for MySQL 5.6 and 5.7
    • On-premises MySQL 5.5, 5.6, and 5.7 databases
    • MySQL 5.5, 5.6, and 5.7 databases on an ECS
    • MySQL 5.5, 5.6, and 5.7 databases on other clouds

    Incremental synchronization

    • Do not change the port of the source and destination databases, or change or delete the passwords and permissions of the source and destination database users. Otherwise, the task may fail.
    • Before a task enters the incremental synchronization phase, ensure that long-running transactions are not started in the source database. Starting the long transaction will block the creation of the logical replication slot and cause the task to fail.
    • Do not execute any DDL statement in the source database. Restricted by the GaussDB(for openGauss) logical replication function, DDL statements cannot be synchronized. If you synchronize DDL statements, data may be inconsistent or the task may fail.
    • Do not change the REPLICA IDENTITY value of a table in the source database. Otherwise, incremental data may be inconsistent or the task may fail.
    • Do not write data to the destination database. Otherwise, data may be inconsistent.
    +
    • Do not change the port of the source and destination databases, or change or delete the passwords and permissions of the source and destination database users. Otherwise, the task may fail.
    • Before a task enters the incremental synchronization phase, ensure that long-running transactions are not started in the source database. Starting the long transaction will block the creation of the logical replication slot and cause the task to fail.
    • Do not execute any DDL statement in the source database. Restricted by the GaussDB logical replication function, DDL statements cannot be synchronized. If you synchronize DDL statements, data may be inconsistent or the task may fail.
    • Do not change the REPLICA IDENTITY value of a table in the source database. Otherwise, incremental data may be inconsistent or the task may fail.
    • Do not write data to the destination database. Otherwise, data may be inconsistent.

    Synchronization comparison

    @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@

    Stop a task normally.

    • After the task is complete, the streaming replication slot created in the source database is automatically deleted.

    Forcibly stop a task.

    - +

    Source DB Engine

    Select GaussDB(for openGauss) Distributed Edition.

    +

    Select GaussDB Distributed Edition.

    Destination DB Engine

    @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@

    Source DB Instance

    The GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed instance you created.

    +

    The GaussDB distributed instance you created.

    Synchronization Mode

    @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@

    DB Instance Name

    The GaussDB(for openGauss) distributed instance selected during synchronization task creation. This parameter cannot be changed.

    +

    The GaussDB distributed instance selected during synchronization task creation. This parameter cannot be changed.

    Database Username

    @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@

    SSL Connection

    SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

    -
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If the SSL certificate is not used, your data may be at risk.
    +
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If SSL is disabled, your data may be at risk.

    DRS supports table-level synchronization. You can select data for synchronization based on your service requirements.

    If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

    -
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    +
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    -

  • After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
    +

  • After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.

    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0122.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0122.html index cd9a280f..40970f18 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0122.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0122.html @@ -333,7 +333,7 @@
    • Yes

      You can customize the maximum DR speed.

      In addition, you can set the time range based on your service requirements. The traffic rate setting usually includes setting of a rate limiting time period and a traffic rate value. Flow can be controlled all day or during specific time ranges. The default value is All day. A maximum of three time ranges can be set, and they cannot overlap.

      The flow rate must be set based on the service scenario and cannot exceed 9,999 MB/s.

      -
      Figure 1 Flow control
      +
      Figure 1 Flow control
    • No
      The DR speed is not limited and the outbound bandwidth of the source database is maximally used, which causes read consumption on the source database accordingly. For example, if the outbound bandwidth of the source database is 100 MB/s and 80% bandwidth is used, the I/O consumption on the source database is 80 MB/s.
      NOTE:
      • Flow control mode takes effect during the initial DR phase only.
      • You can also change the flow control mode when the task is in the Configuration state. On the Basic Information tab, In the DR Information area, click Modify next to Flow Control. In the dialog box that is displayed, change the flow control mode. The flow control mode cannot be changed for a task that is in Starting state.
      @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@
    -

  • After the DR task is submitted, view and manage it on the Disaster Recovery Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
    +

  • After the DR task is submitted, view and manage it on the Disaster Recovery Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.

    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0123.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0123.html index dd1376a6..c43289e2 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0123.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0123.html @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@
    -

  • After the DR task is submitted, view and manage it on the Disaster Recovery Management page.

    +

  • After the DR task is submitted, view and manage it on the Disaster Recovery Management page.

    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0128.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0128.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17b7021d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0128.html @@ -0,0 +1,306 @@ + + +

    From MySQL to Kafka

    +

    Supported Source and Destination Databases

    +
    + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Supported databases

    Source DB

    +

    Destination DB

    +
    • On-premises MySQL databases
    • MySQL databases on an ECS
    +
    • Kafka
    • DMS for Kafka
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Prerequisites

    +
    +

    Suggestions

    +
    +

    Precautions

    Before creating a synchronization task, read the following notes:

    + +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 2 Precautions

    Type

    +

    Restrictions

    +

    Database permissions

    +
    • The source database user must have the following permissions: SELECT, SHOW VIEW, EVENT, LOCK TABLES, REPLICATION SLAVE, REPLICATION CLIENT, and RELOAD.
    +

    Synchronization object

    +
    • The table data can be synchronized.
    +
    • Tables with storage engine different to MyISAM and InnoDB cannot be synchronized.
    +

    Source database

    +
    • During the incremental synchronization, the binlog of the source MySQL database must be enabled and use the row-based format.
    • If the storage space is sufficient, store the source database binlog for as long as possible. The recommended retention period is three days.
    • If the expire_logs_days value of the source database is set to 0, the synchronization may fail.
    • Enable GTID for the source database. If GTID is not enabled for the source database, primary/standby switchover is not supported. DRS tasks will be interrupted and cannot be restored during a switchover.
    • During an incremental synchronization, the server_id value of the MySQL source database must be set. If the source database version is MySQL 5.6 or earlier, the server_id value ranges from 2 to 4294967296. If the source database is MySQL 5.7, the server_id value ranges from 1 to 4294967296.
    • The database and table names in the source database cannot contain non-ASCII characters, or special characters '<`>/\
    +

    Destination database

    +
    • The destination database is a Kafka database.
    +

    Precautions

    +
    • Objects that have dependencies must be synchronized at the same time to avoid synchronization failure. Common dependencies: tables referenced by views, views referenced by views, views and tables referenced by stored procedures/functions/triggers, and tables referenced by primary and foreign keys
    • Cascade operations cannot be performed on tables with foreign keys. If the foreign key index of a table is a common index, the table structure may fail to be created. You are advised to use a unique index.
    • Binlogs cannot be forcibly deleted. Otherwise, the synchronization task fails.
    • The source database does not support the reset master or reset master to command, which may cause DRS task failures or data inconsistency.
    • If the source MySQL database does not support TLS 1.2 or is a self-built database of an earlier version (earlier than 5.6.46 or between 5.7 and 5.7.28), you need to submit an O&M application for testing the SSL connection.
    • During the synchronization, do not delete or change the username, password, or permission of the source database, or change the port of the destination database.
    • Data inconsistency may occur when the MyISAM table is modified during synchronization.
    • During synchronization of table-level objects, renaming tables is not recommended.
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Procedure

    1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click Create Synchronization Task.
    2. On the Create Synchronization Instance page, specify the task name, description, and the synchronization instance details, and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 3 Task and recipient description

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Region

      +

      The region where the synchronization instance is deployed. You can change the region.

      +

      Project

      +

      The project corresponds to the current region and can be changed.

      +

      Task Name

      +

      The task name must start with a letter and consist of 4 to 50 characters. It can contain only letters, digits, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).

      +

      Description

      +

      The description consists of a maximum of 256 characters and cannot contain special characters !=<>'&"\

      +
      +
      + +
      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 4 Synchronization instance settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Data Flow

      +

      Choose Self-built to self-built.

      +

      Source DB Engine

      +

      Select MySQL.

      +

      Destination DB Engine

      +

      Select Kafka.

      +

      Network Type

      +

      The Public network is used as an example. Available options: VPC, Public network and VPN or Direct Connect

      +

      AZ

      +

      Select the AZ where you want to create the DRS instance. Selecting the one housing the source or destination database can provide better performance.

      +

      If Instance Type is set to primary/standby, you can specify Primary AZ and Standby AZ.

      +

      VPC

      +

      Select an available VPC.

      +

      Synchronization Instance Subnet

      +

      Select the subnet where the synchronization instance is located. You can also click View Subnet to go to the network console to view the subnet where the instance resides.

      +

      By default, the DRS instance and the destination DB instance are in the same subnet. You need to select the subnet where the DRS instance resides and ensure that there are available IP addresses. To ensure that the synchronization instance is successfully created, only subnets with DHCP enabled are displayed.

      +

      Security Group

      +

      Select a security group. You can use security group rules to allow or deny access to the instance.

      +

      Synchronization Mode

      +
      • Incremental

        Through log parsing, incremental data generated on the source database is synchronized to the destination database.

        +

        During synchronization, the source database continues to provide services for external systems with zero downtime.

        +
      +

      Tags

      +
      • This setting is optional. Adding tags helps you better identify and manage your tasks. Each task can have up to 20 tags.
      • After a task is created, you can view its tag details on the Tags tab. For details, see Tag Management.
      +
      +
      +

      If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. After three days, the task automatically ends.

      +
      +

    3. On the Configure Source and Destination Databases page, wait until the synchronization instance is created. Then, specify source and destination database information and click Test Connection for both the source and destination databases to check whether they have been connected to the synchronization instance. After the connection tests are successful, select the check box before the agreement and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 5 Source database settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      IP Address or Domain Name

      +

      The IP address or domain name of the source database.

      +

      Port

      +

      The port of the source database. Range: 1 – 65535

      +

      Database Username

      +

      The username for accessing the source database.

      +

      Database Password

      +

      The password for the database username.

      +

      SSL Connection

      +

      SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

      +
      NOTE:
      • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
      • If the SSL certificate is not used, your data may be at risk.
      +
      +
      +
      +

      The username and password of the source database are encrypted and stored in DRS and will be cleared after the task is deleted.

      +
      + +
      + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 6 Source database information

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      IP Address or Domain Name

      +

      The IP address or domain name of the destination database.

      +

      Security Protocol

      +

      Available options: PLAINTEXT, SSL, SASL_PLAINTEXT, and SASL_SSL. For details, see Kafka Authentication.

      +
      +
      +

    4. On the Set Synchronization Task page, select the synchronization policy, objects, and data format, and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 7 Synchronization Object

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Topic Synchronization Policy

      +

      Topic synchronization policy. The options are as follows:

      +
      • Select A specified topic if the data volume of the source database is small.
      • Select Auto-generated topics if each table contains a lot of data. Then, the system automatically generates a topic for each table.
      +

      Topic

      +

      Select the topic to be synchronized to the destination database. This parameter is available when the topic is set to A specified topic.

      +

      Topic Name Format

      +

      Topic name format. This parameter is available when Topic Synchronization Policy is set to Auto-generated topics.

      +

      Only variables database and tablename are supported. The other characters must be constants. Replace $database$ with the database name and $tablename$ with the table name.

      +

      For example, if this parameter is set to $database$-$tablename$ and the database name is db1, and the table name is tab1, the topic name is db1-tab1. If DDL statements are synchronized, $tablename$ is empty and the topic name is db1.

      +

      Number of Partitions

      +

      This parameter is available when Topic Synchronization Policy is set to Auto-generated topics.

      +

      The number of partitions of a topic. Each topic can have multiple partitions. More partitions can provide higher throughput but consume more resources. Set the number of partitions based on the actual situation of brokers.

      +

      Replication Factor

      +

      This parameter is available when Topic Synchronization Policy is set to Auto-generated topics.

      +

      Number of copies of a topic. Each topic can have multiple copies, and the copies are placed on different brokers in a cluster. The number of copies cannot exceed the number of brokers. Otherwise, the topic fails to be created.

      +

      Synchronize Topic To

      +

      The policy for synchronizing topics to the Kafka partitions.

      +
      • If topics are synchronized to different partitions by hash value of the database and table names, the performance on a single table query can be improved.
      • If topics are synchronized to partition 0, strong consistency can be obtained but write performance is impacted.
      • If topics are synchronized to different partitions by hash value of the primary key, one table corresponds to one topic. This prevents data from being written to the same partition, and consumers can obtain data from different partitions concurrently.
      +

      Data Format in Kafka

      +

      Select the data format to be delivered from MySQL to Kafka.

      +
      • JSON: JSON message format, which is easy to interpret but takes up more space.
      • JSON-C: A data format that is compatible with multiple batch and stream computing frameworks.
      +

      For details, see Kafka Message Format.

      +

      Synchronization Object

      +

      Available options: Tables and Databases.

      +
      • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.
      +
      +
      +

    5. On the Process Data page, select the columns to be processed.

      • If data processing is not required, click Next.
      • If you need to process columns, set processing rules by referring to Processing Data.
      +

    6. On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

      • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
      • If all check items are successful, click Next.

        You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

        +
        +
      +

    7. On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

      +

      + + + + + + + +
      Table 8 Task startup settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Started Time

      +

      Set Start Time to Start upon task creation or Start at a specified time based on site requirements.

      +
      NOTE:

      After a synchronization task is started, the performance of the source and destination databases may be affected. You are advised to start a synchronization task during off-peak hours.

      +
      +
      +
      +

    8. After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

      • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
      • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
      +

    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: Between Self-built Databases
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0446.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0446.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74a17bea --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0446.html @@ -0,0 +1,306 @@ + + +

    From Oracle to PostgreSQL

    +

    Supported Source and Destination Databases

    +
    + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Supported databases

    Source DB

    +

    Destination DB

    +
    • On-premises databases
    • ECS databases
    +
    • RDS for PostgreSQL
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Suggestions

    • When a task is being started or in the full synchronization phase, do not perform DDL operations on the source database. Otherwise, the task may be abnormal.
    • To keep data consistency before and after the synchronization, ensure that no data is written to the destination database during the synchronization.
    +
    + +
    +

    Precautions

    Before creating a synchronization task, read the following notes:

    + +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 2 Precautions

    Type

    +

    Restrictions

    +

    Database permissions

    +
    • Source database:
      • Full synchronization requires the following permissions: CREATE SESSION, SELECT ANY DICTIONARY, and SELECT for single tables (GRANT SELECT <userName.tbName> to drsUser)
      • Full+Incremental synchronization:

        To synchronize a container database (CDB) of Oracle 12c or later, you must have the following permissions: CREATE SESSION, SELECT ANY DICTIONARY, SELECT for a single table (GRANT SELECT <userName.tbName> to drsUser), EXECUTE_CATALOG_ROLE, SELECT ANY TRANSACTION, LOGMINING, SELECT ON SYS.COL$, SELECT ON SYS.OBJ$, and SET CONTAINER (GRANT SET CONTAINER TO <userName> CONTAINER=ALL).

        +

        To synchronize a pluggable database (PDB) of Oracle 12c or later, you must have the following permissions: CREATE SESSION, SELECT ANY DICTIONARY, SELECT for a single table (GRANT SELECT <userName.tbName> to drsUser), EXECUTE_CATALOG_ROLE, SELECT ANY TRANSACTION, LOGMINING, SELECT ON SYS.COL$, and SELECT ON SYS.OBJ$, and CREATE SESSION, SELECT ANY DICTIONARY, EXECUTE_CATALOG_ROLE, SELECT ANY TRANSACTION, LOGMINING and SET CONTAINER (GRANT SET CONTAINER TO <userName> CONTAINER=ALL) permissions for a CDB.

        +

        For Oracle 11g and earlier versions, the following permissions are required for database synchronization: CREATE SESSION, SELECT ANY DICTIONARY, SELECT for a single table (GRANT SELECT <userName.tbName> to drsUser), EXECUTE_CATALOG_ROLE, SELECT ANY TRANSACTION, SELECT ON SYS.COL$, and SELECT ON SYS.OBJ$.

        +
      • During incremental synchronization, enable PK, UI, or ALL supplemental logging for the source Oracle database at the database level or table level. If supplemental logging is enabled at table level, enable supplemental logging again after you rebuild or rename tables. During the synchronization, ensure that the preceding settings are always enabled.
      +
    • The destination database user must have the following permissions: INSERT, SELECT, UPDATE, DELETE, CONNECT, CREATE, and REFERENCES.
    +

    Synchronization object

    +
    • Only tables, indexes, and (primary key, null, not null) constraints can be synchronized. Views, foreign keys, stored procedures, triggers, functions, events, and virtual columns cannot be synchronized.
    • In the full synchronization phase, bfile, xml, sdo_geometry, urowid, interval (precision greater than 6 digits), and user-defined types are not supported.
    • In the incremental synchronization phase, bfile, xml, interval, sdo_geometry, urowid, timestamp (precision greater than 6 digits), and user-defined types are not supported.
    • For the TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE data type, the data cannot be greater than 9999-12-31 23:59:59.999999 after being converted based on the time zone of the destination database.
    • The default values of the source database can be to_date and sys_guid functions. To use other functions as default values, ensure that the destination database has the same functions. If the destination database does not have the corresponding function, the following results may be displayed:
      • The default value may be left empty.
      • The table fails to be created. As a result, the object comparison result is inconsistent or the task fails.
      +
    • If the table contains only LOB columns, data inconsistency may occur.
    • Tables whose default values contain expressions of functions cannot be synchronized.
    • Temporary tables in the source database cannot be synchronized.
    +

    Source database

    +
    • The names of databases and tables cannot contain non-ASCII characters or special characters .><\`|,?'!"
    • An empty source database cannot be synchronized.
    • Only the following character sets are supported: ZHS16GBK, AL32UTF8, UTF8, US7ASCII, WE8MSWIN1252, and WE8ISO8859P1.
    +

    Destination database

    +
    • The destination DB instance is running properly.
    • The destination DB instance must have sufficient storage space.
    • Do not use foreign keys for tables during incremental synchronization. Otherwise, the sequence of writing data to different tables may be inconsistent with that in the source database, which may trigger foreign key constraints and cause synchronization failures.
    +

    Precautions

    +
    • Objects that have dependencies must be synchronized at the same time to avoid synchronization failure.
    • Object names, such as table names, are converted to lowercase letters after being synchronized to the destination database. For example, ABC is converted to abc. In incremental synchronization, the source database cannot contain tables with the same name but different letter cases. Otherwise, the synchronization will fail.
    • If there are special characters in the Oracle database, the code of the destination Oracle database must be the same as the code of the source Oracle database. Otherwise, garbled characters are displayed in the destination database.
    • If a task fails because the (self-built) table structure of a table without primary keys is not synchronized and the task cannot be resumed after the table structure is restored, reset the task.
    • During table structure synchronization, if the destination database has a constraint with the same name as the source database, the table fails to be created.
    • If you use DRS to synchronize table structures, the tables, constraints, and indexes in the same schema cannot have the same name with different letter cases. For example, table A contains an index named inx1, and table B contains an index name a. Table A and index a have the same name with different letter cases, which will cause table structure synchronization to fail. If multiple schemas are mapped to one schema, the source schemas cannot contain tables, constraints, and indexes with the same name but different letter cases.
    • If the Oracle character set is WE8MSWIN1252, the CLOB column synchronized to the destination database may contain garbled characters. You can change the character set of the source database to AL32UTF8 before the synchronization.
    • If the length of a table structure in the Oracle database exceeds 65,535 bytes, the synchronization may fail. The length of a table structure is the total length of all columns. The length of the char or varchar2 type is related to the code.
    • The size of an Oracle archive log file must be greater than the maximum size of a single data record to prevent incremental data parsing exceptions caused by cross-file (more than two log files) of a single data record.
    • For an Oracle RAC cluster, use the scan IP address and service name to create a task. The SCAN IP address can provide better fault tolerance, load capability, and synchronization experience.
    • If the source is an Oracle RAC database and the SCAN IP address is used to configure a DRS task, ensure that the SCAN IP address and DRS node IP address can communicate with all virtual IP addresses of the source database. Otherwise, the connectivity check fails. If the SCAN IP address is not used, the virtual IP address of a node can be used. In this case, DRS logs are parsed only on the RAC node specified by the virtual IP address.
    • If the source is an RAC database, all RAC nodes must be online when incremental synchronization is started for the first time. Otherwise, an error occurs during incremental synchronization.
    • If the source is an RAC database, the number of nodes cannot be increased or decreased during incremental synchronization to avoid incremental synchronization exceptions and ensure strong data consistency.
    • During synchronization, do not delete the username, password, and permissions of the source and destination databases or change the port of the destination database.
    • During the synchronization, do not perform the resetlogs operation on the source Oracle database. Otherwise, data cannot be synchronized and tasks cannot be restored.
    • During synchronization, the rollback operation of the LOB type is not supported. Otherwise, the synchronization task fails.
    • In a full synchronization for the table structure, the length of the char and varchar2 characters in the source database is automatically increased by at least 1.5 times by byte in the destination database (because the length of the destination database is in the unit of byte). The increase multiple depends on the character set of the source and destination databases. For example, if the character set is UTF8, increase the length (byte) by three times by default. If the character set is GBK, increase the length (byte) by two times by default.
    • During full synchronization of the partitioned table structure, the table is converted to a non-partitioned table. During incremental synchronization, operations related to the partitioned table in the source database may fail to be executed in the destination database.
    • Only normal indexes are synchronized when indexes are synchronized. Primary key constraints are synchronized with the table structure.
    • During an incremental synchronization, 0x00 at the end of BLOB and the spaces at the end of CLOB are truncated.
    • During incremental synchronization, some DDL operations are supported.
      • Table-level synchronization supports alter table add column, alter table drop column, alter table rename column, alter table modify column, and truncate table. The modification of default values is not supported.
      +
    • The names of mapped table-level objects are case-insensitive. For example, the ABC table mapped to the destination database will be changed to table abc.
    • When editing the task to add a new table, ensure that transactions of the new table have been committed. Otherwise, transactions that are not committed may fail to be synchronized to the destination database. You are advised to add tables during off-peak hours.
    • During a full synchronization, DRS writes large amount of data to the destination PostgreSQL database. As a result, the number of PostgreSQL WAL logs increases sharply, and the PostgreSQL disk space may be used up. You can disable the PostgreSQL log backup function before the full synchronization to reduce the number of WAL logs. After the synchronization is complete, enable the function.
      CAUTION:

      Disabling log backup will affect database disaster recovery. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

      +
      +
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Prerequisites

    +
    +

    Procedure

    This section uses real-time synchronization from Oracle to RDS for PostgreSQL as an example to describe how to configure a real-time synchronization task.

    +
    1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click Create Synchronization Task.
    2. On the Create Synchronization Instance page, specify the task name, description, and the synchronization instance details, and click Create Now.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 3 Task and recipient description

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Region

      +

      The region where the synchronization instance is deployed. You can change the region.

      +

      Project

      +

      The project corresponds to the current region and can be changed.

      +

      Task Name

      +

      The task name must start with a letter and consist of 4 to 50 characters. It can contain only letters, digits, hyphens (-), and underscores (_).

      +

      Description

      +

      The description consists of a maximum of 256 characters and cannot contain special characters !=<>'&"\

      +
      +
      + +
      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 4 Synchronization instance settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Data Flow

      +

      Select To the cloud.

      +

      Source DB Engine

      +

      Select Oracle.

      +

      Destination DB Engine

      +

      Select PostgreSQL.

      +

      Network Type

      +

      The Public network is used as an example. Available options: VPC, Public network and VPN or Direct Connect

      +

      Destination DB Instance

      +

      The RDS for PostgreSQL instance you created.

      +

      Synchronization Instance Subnet

      +

      Select the subnet where the synchronization instance is located. You can also click View Subnet to go to the network console to view the subnet where the instance resides.

      +

      By default, the DRS instance and the destination DB instance are in the same subnet. You need to select the subnet where the DRS instance resides and ensure that there are available IP addresses. To ensure that the synchronization instance is successfully created, only subnets with DHCP enabled are displayed.

      +

      Synchronization Mode

      +
      • Full+Incremental

        This synchronization mode allows you to synchronize data in real time. After a full synchronization initializes the destination database, an incremental synchronization parses logs to ensure data consistency between the source and destination databases.

        +
        NOTE:

        If you select Full+Incremental, data generated during the full synchronization will be continuously synchronized to the destination database, and the source remains accessible.

        +
        +
      • Full

        All database objects and data you selected are synchronized to the destination database at a time. This mode is applicable to scenarios where service interruption is acceptable.

        +
      +

      Tags

      +
      • This setting is optional. Adding tags helps you better identify and manage your tasks. Each task can have up to 20 tags.
      • After a task is created, you can view its tag details on the Tags tab. For details, see Tag Management.
      +
      +
      +

      If a task fails to be created, DRS retains the task for three days by default. After three days, the task automatically ends.

      +
      +

    3. On the Configure Source and Destination Databases page, wait until the synchronization instance is created. Then, specify source and destination database information and click Test Connection for both the source and destination databases to check whether they have been connected to the synchronization instance. After the connection tests are successful, select the check box before the agreement and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 5 Source database settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      IP Address or Domain Name

      +

      The IP address or domain name of the source database.

      +
      NOTE:

      For a RAC cluster, use a Scan IP address to improve access performance.

      +
      +

      Port

      +

      The port of the source database. Range: 1 – 65535

      +

      Database Service Name

      +

      Enter a database service name (Service Name/SID). The client can connect to the Oracle database through the database service name. For details about how to query the database service name, see the prompt on the GUI.

      +

      PDB Name

      +

      Container database (CDB) and pluggable database (PDB) are new features in Oracle 12c and later versions. This function is optional, but it must be enabled if you want to migrate only PDB tables.

      +

      Enter the service name, SID, username, and password of the CDB that contains the PDB tables to be migrated.

      +

      Database Username

      +

      The username for accessing the source database.

      +

      Database Password

      +

      The password for the database username.

      +

      SSL Connection

      +

      SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

      +
      NOTE:
      • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
      • If SSL is disabled, your data may be at risk.
      +
      +
      +
      +

      The IP address, domain name, username, and password of the source database are encrypted and stored in DRS, and will be cleared after the task is deleted.

      +
      +
      +
      + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 6 Destination database settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      DB Instance Name

      +

      The RDS for PostgreSQL instance you selected when creating the task. The parameter cannot be changed.

      +

      Database Username

      +

      The username for accessing the destination database.

      +

      Database Password

      +

      The database username and password are encrypted and stored in DRS, and will be cleared after the task is deleted. You can change the password if necessary.

      +
      +
      +
      +

    4. On the Set Synchronization Task page, select the synchronization object type and synchronization objects, and click Next.

      +

      + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      Table 7 Synchronization mode and object

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Flow Control

      +

      Flow Control

      +

      You can choose whether to control the flow.

      +
      • Yes

        You can customize the maximum migration speed.

        +

        In addition, you can set the time range based on your service requirements. The traffic rate setting usually includes setting of a rate limiting time period and a traffic rate value. Flow can be controlled all day or during specific time ranges. The default value is All day. A maximum of three time ranges can be set, and they cannot overlap.

        +

        The flow rate must be set based on the service scenario and cannot exceed 9,999 MB/s.

        +
      • No
        The synchronization speed is not limited and the outbound bandwidth of the source database is maximally used, which will increase the read burden on the source database. For example, if the outbound bandwidth of the source database is 100 MB/s and 80% bandwidth is used, the I/O consumption on the source database is 80 MB/s.
        NOTE:
        • The flow control mode takes effect only in the full synchronization phase.
        • You can also change the flow control mode after creating a task. For details, see Modifying the Flow Control Mode.
        +
        +
        +
      +

      Synchronization Object Type

      +

      Available options: Table structure, Data, and Constraint

      +
      • Data is mandatory.
      • If Table structure is selected, the destination database cannot contain tables whose names are the same as the source tables to be synchronized.
      • If Table structure is not selected, the destination database must have tables that match the source tables, and the table structure must be the same as the selected source table structures.
      +

      Synchronization Object

      +

      Select Tables or Databases as required.

      +
      • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.
      +
      NOTE:
      • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
      • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
      +
      • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
      • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
      +
      +
      +
      +

    5. On the Check Task page, check the synchronization task.

      • If any check fails, review the cause and rectify the fault. After the fault is rectified, click Check Again.
      • If all check items are successful, click Next.

        You can proceed to the next step only when all checks are successful. If there are any items that require confirmation, view and confirm the details first before proceeding to the next step.

        +
        +
      +

    6. On the displayed page, specify Start Time, confirm that the configured information is correct, and click Submit to submit the task.

      +

      + + + + + + + +
      Table 8 Task startup settings

      Parameter

      +

      Description

      +

      Started Time

      +

      Set Start Time to Start upon task creation or Start at a specified time based on site requirements.

      +
      NOTE:

      After a synchronization task is started, the performance of the source and destination databases may be affected. You are advised to start a synchronization task during off-peak hours.

      +
      +
      +
      +

    7. After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

      • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
      • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
      +

    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: To the Cloud
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0451.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0451.html index a17ad7ac..08161754 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0451.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0451.html @@ -6,7 +6,9 @@ diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0452.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0452.html index f9393a03..0a02606e 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0452.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0452.html @@ -7,6 +7,8 @@
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0458.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0458.html index 65713470..b13b3255 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0458.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_04_0458.html @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ AND SP.name NOT LIKE '##%##' AND SP.name NOT LIKE 'NT AUTHORITY%' AND SP.name NOT LIKE 'NT SERVICE%' AND SP.name NOT IN ('rdsadmin','rdsbackup','rdsuser','rdsmirror','public') -

  • Execute the script in 1:

    Figure 1 Obtaining the script
    +

  • Execute the script in 1:

    Figure 1 Obtaining the script

  • Copy and execute the script obtain in 2 on the destination instance. The created Login account is the same as the original one.
  • Map the newly created Login account to the database user permissions that have been migrated to the RDS SQL Server DB instance to ensure permission consistency.

    declare @DBName nvarchar(200)
 declare @Login_name nvarchar(200)
 declare @SQL nvarchar(MAX)
@@ -49,8 +49,8 @@ deallocate DBName_Cursor

    • Database Link

    SQL Server allows you to create database links to interact with databases on external DB instances. Therefore you can query, synchronize, and compare databases of different types or on different DB instances. However, these links cannot be automatically synchronized to the DB instance on cloud so you need to synchronize them manually.

    -
    1. Connect the local DB instance and cloud DB instance through Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio. Choose Server Objects > Linked Servers and locate the DBLink of the current DB instance.

      Figure 2 Viewing database links
      -

    2. Select the linked server and press F7. The Object Explore page is displayed. On this page, you can quickly create a script.

      Figure 3 Creating the script
      +
      1. Connect the local DB instance and cloud DB instance through Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio. Choose Server Objects > Linked Servers and locate the DBLink of the current DB instance.

        Figure 2 Viewing database links
        +

      2. Select the linked server and press F7. The Object Explore page is displayed. On this page, you can quickly create a script.

        Figure 3 Creating the script

      3. In the displayed window, view all the scripts for creating DBLinks of the current DB instance. You only need to copy the scripts to the destination DB instance and change the password on @rmtpassword.

        USE [master]
 GO
  
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ GO

      Agent JOB

      Agent Job is the agent service of Microsoft SQL Server. It helps you quickly create scheduled tasks on DB instances, perform routine O&M, and process data. You need to manually migrate local Job scripts.

      -
      1. Connect the local DB instance and cloud DB instance through Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio. Choose SQL Server Agent > Jobs and locate all the jobs of the current DB instance.

        Figure 4 Viewing Jobs
        -

      2. Select a job and press F7. All jobs are displayed on the Object Explore page. Select all jobs and create a script in the new window.

        Figure 5 Creating a script
        +
        1. Connect the local DB instance and cloud DB instance through Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio. Choose SQL Server Agent > Jobs and locate all the jobs of the current DB instance.

          Figure 4 Viewing Jobs
          +

        2. Select a job and press F7. All jobs are displayed on the Object Explore page. Select all jobs and create a script in the new window.

          Figure 5 Creating a script

        3. Copy the T-SQL script in the new window to the new DB instance, and then modify the following key items to ensure that the creation is successful.

          • Modify the owner account of each job.

            Example:

            @owner_login_name=N'rdsuser'

          • Modify the DB instance name of each job.

            Example:

            @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ ALTER DATABASE [tempdb] ADD FILE ( NAME = N'tempdb6', FILENAME = N'D:\RDSDBDATA\ GO ALTER DATABASE [tempdb] ADD FILE ( NAME = N'tempdb7', FILENAME = N'D:\RDSDBDATA\Temp\tempdb7.ndf' , SIZE = 65536KB , FILEGROWTH = 65536KB ) GO -
            Figure 6 Checking temporary files
            +
            Figure 6 Checking temporary files
          • Database isolation level: Check whether the database isolation level is enabled on the source DB instance and synchronize the isolation level to the RDS SQL Server DB instance. There are two snapshot isolation parameters:
            • Is Read Committed Snapshot On
            • Allow Snapshot Isolation

            If the database isolation level of the source DB instance is enabled, you can run the following script on the destination database to enable the database isolation level:

            USE [DBName]
@@ -105,11 +105,11 @@ GO
 ALTER DATABASE [DBName] SET ALLOW_SNAPSHOT_ISOLATION ON
 GO
          • Max Degree of Parallelism: The maximum degree of parallelism is set to 0 by default on the RDS SQL Server instance. You can also set the value based on the local settings to avoid exceptions in different service scenarios.

            In Object Explorer, right-click a local server and select Properties. Click the Advanced node. In the Max Degree of Parallelism box, view the value of the local instance and change the max degree of parallelism value in the parameter group of the destination RDS SQL Server instance to the same.

            -
            Figure 7 Max Degree of Parallelism
            -
            Log in to the RDS console. On the Instance Management page, click the target DB instance name. Choose Parameters, search for the max degree of parallelism parameter, and change its value.
            Figure 8 max degree of parallelism
            +
            Figure 7 Max Degree of Parallelism
            +
            Log in to the RDS console. On the Instance Management page, click the target DB instance name. Choose Parameters, search for the max degree of parallelism parameter, and change its value.
            Figure 8 max degree of parallelism
          • Check whether the database recovery model on the cloud is set to Full. If not, change the mode.

            Right-click the database and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. In the displayed page, select Options. Then, verify that Recovery Model is set to Full. Ensure that the database is highly available and the backup policy is executable.

            -
            Figure 9 Checking the database recovery model
            +
            Figure 9 Checking the database recovery model
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_05_0018.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_05_0018.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1df0a0d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_05_0018.html @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + +

    Kafka Authentication

    +

    PLAINTEXT

    No security authentication mode is available. You only need to enter the IP address and port for connection.

    +
    Figure 1 PLAINTEXT
    +
    +

    SASL_PLAINTEXT

    The SASL mechanism is used to connect to Kafka, and you need to configure SASL parameters.

    +
    Figure 2 SASL_PLAINTEXT
    + +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Parameter settings

    Parameter

    +

    Description

    +

    SASL Mechanisms

    +

    SASL is used by client. The following four items are supported. Kafka server uses the GSSAPI mechanism by default.

    +
    • GSSAPI
    • PLAIN
    • SCRAM-SHA-256
    • SCRAM-SHA-512
    +

    Token Delegation

    +

    Whether an agency token is used for authentication. This option is available when SCRAM-SHA-256 or SCRAM-SHA-512 is selected for SASL Mechanisms.

    +

    Username

    +

    Username for logging in to the database

    +

    Password

    +

    Password for the username

    +
    +
    +
    +

    SSL

    SSL is used to encrypt the connection to Kafka. Related parameters need to be configured.

    +
    Figure 3 SSL
    + +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 2 Parameter settings

    Parameter

    +

    Description

    +

    Truststore Certificate

    +

    SSL certificate with the file name extension .jks.

    +

    Truststore Certificate Password

    +

    Password of the certificate

    +

    Endpoint Identification Algorithm

    +

    Endpoint identification algorithm for verifying the host name of the server using the server certificate. This parameter is optional. If this parameter is left blank, host name verification is disabled.

    +

    Mutual SSL Authentication

    +

    Mutual SSL Authentication

    +

    Keystore Certificate

    +

    If mutual SSL authentication is enabled, you need to upload the mutual SSL authentication certificate with the file name extension .jks.

    +

    Keystore Certificate Password

    +

    Password of the mutual SSL authentication certificate. This option is available if mutual SSL authentication is enabled.

    +

    Keystore Private Key Password

    +

    (Optional) Password of the private key in the keystore certificate.

    +
    +
    +
    +

    SASL_SSL

    If the SASL and SSL are used, configure SSL and SASL parameters. For details, see SASL_PLAINTEXT and SSL.

    +
    Figure 4 SASL_SSL
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: Operation Reference in Synchronization Scenarios
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0003.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0003.html index 0f5d282f..8a546a3c 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0003.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0003.html @@ -6,12 +6,14 @@
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0005.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0005.html index 59f55041..f4d0a1c1 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0005.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_06_0005.html @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@

    Step 1: Create a Synchronization Task

    Process

    A complete real-time synchronization consists of creating a synchronization task, tracking task progress, analyzing synchronization logs, and comparing data consistency. By comparing multiple items and data, you can synchronize data between different service systems in real time.

    A complete real-time synchronization involves the following procedures.

    -
    Figure 1 Flowchart
    +
    Figure 1 Flowchart

    This section describes how to synchronize data from a MySQL database to an RDS MySQL database. To configure other storage engines, you can refer to the following procedures.

    @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@

    SSL encrypts the connections between the source and destination databases. If SSL is enabled, upload the SSL CA root certificate.

    This parameter is unavailable when the network type is VPC network and the database type is RDS DB instance.

    -
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If the SSL certificate is not used, your data may be at risk.
    +
    NOTE:
    • The maximum size of a single certificate file that can be uploaded is 500 KB.
    • If SSL is disabled, your data may be at risk.
    @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@

    Synchronize

    -

    Normal indexes and incremental DDLs can be synchronized. You can determine whether to synchronize data based on service requirements.

    +

    Normal indexes and incremental DDLs can be synchronized. You can determine whether to synchronize data based on service requirements. If you deselect Normal index, DDL statements related to index adding will be filtered out in the incremental phase. If the DDL statements contain other operations, they may also be filtered out.

    Start Point

    @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@

    Select Tables or Databases as required.

    • If the synchronization objects in source and destination databases have different names, you can map the source object name to the destination one. For details, see Mapping Object Names.

      If the database table name contains characters other than letters, digits, and underscores (_), or the mapped database table name contains hyphens (-) and number signs (#), the name length cannot exceed 42 characters.

    -
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    +
    NOTE:
    • To quickly select the desired database objects, you can use the search function.
    • If there are changes made to the source databases or objects, click in the upper right corner to update the objects to be synchronized.
    • If the object name contains spaces, the spaces before and after the object name are not displayed. If there are multiple spaces between the object name and the object name, only one space is displayed.
    • The name of the selected synchronization object cannot contain spaces.
    @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@
    -

  • After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.
    +

  • After the task is submitted, you can view and manage it on the Data Synchronization Management page.

    • You can view the task status. For more information about task status, see Task Statuses.
    • You can click in the upper-right corner to view the latest task status.

    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_08_0002.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_08_0002.html index dacf0c91..7146fbd1 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_08_0002.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_08_0002.html @@ -6,9 +6,11 @@
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0004.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0004.html index f2f8cd7d..2a440792 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0004.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0004.html @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
    • Task name
    • Description
    • Task start time

    Prerequisites

    You have logged in to the DRS console.

    -

    Procedure

    1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click the target synchronization task name in the Task Name/ID column.
    2. On the Basic Information tab, locate the information to be modified in the Task Information area.

      • You can click to modify the task name and description.
        • To submit the change, click .
        • To cancel the change, click .
        +

        Procedure

        1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click the target synchronization task name in the Task Name/ID column.
        2. On the Basic Information tab, locate the information to be modified in the Task Information area.

          • You can click to modify the task name and description.
            • To submit the change, click .
            • To cancel the change, click .
            diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0012.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0012.html index a1c38a5b..bd904341 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0012.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0012.html @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@

            Step 4: Compare Synchronization Items

            Scenarios

            This section describes how to compare synchronization items to check if there are any differences between source and destination databases. To minimize the impact on services and shorten the service interruption duration, the following comparison methods are provided:

            • Object-level comparison: compares objects such as databases, indexes, tables, views, stored procedures, functions, and table sorting rules.
            • Data-level comparison is classified into row comparison and value comparison.
              • Row comparison: It helps you compare the number of rows in the tables to be synchronized. This comparison method is recommended because it is fast.
              • Value comparison: It helps you check whether data in the synchronized table is consistent. The comparison process is relatively slow.
              -
            • Account comparison: It compares usernames and permissions of the source and destination databases.
            +
          • Account comparison: It compares usernames and permissions of the source and destination databases.
          • Periodic comparison: DRS periodically compares the number of rows in the source database table with those in the destination database table and displays the comparison results. To compare objects periodically, enable comparison policy.

            • When you check data consistency, compare the number of rows first. If the number of rows are inconsistent, you can then compare the data in the table to determine the inconsistent data.

            Constraints

            • A comparison task can be created only when the task is in the incremental phase. When a full task is complete, DRS automatically creates object-level and row comparison tasks.
            • If DDL operations were performed on the source database, you need to compare the objects again to ensure the accuracy of the comparison results.
            • If data in the destination database is modified separately, the comparison results may be inconsistent.
            • Currently, only tables with primary keys support value comparison. For tables that do not support value comparison, you can compare rows. Therefore, you can compare data by row or value based on scenarios.
            • To prevent resources from being occupied for a long time, DRS limits the row comparison duration. If the row comparison duration exceeds the threshold, the row comparison task stops automatically. If the source database is a relational database, the row comparison duration is 60 minutes. If the source database is a non-relational database, for example, MongoDB, the row comparison duration is 30 minutes.
            @@ -24,13 +24,18 @@
          • User comparison: Click the User Comparison tab to view the comparison results of database accounts and permissions.
            • Full synchronization tasks do not support account comparisons.
            • Only PostgreSQL to PostgreSQL synchronization supports account comparison.
            • -

          • After the comparison creation task is submitted, the Data-Level Comparison tab is displayed. Click to refresh the list and view the comparison result of the specified comparison type.

            Value comparison only applies to tables with single-column primary key or unique index. You can use row comparison for tables that do not support value comparison. Therefore, you can compare data by row or value based on scenarios.

            +

          • After the comparison creation task is submitted, the Data-Level Comparison tab is displayed. Click to refresh the list and view the comparison result of the specified comparison type.

            Value comparison only applies to tables with single-column primary key or unique index. You can use row comparison for tables that do not support value comparison. Therefore, you can compare data by row or value based on scenarios.

            If you want to view the row or value comparison details, click View Results.

            If you want to download the row comparison or value comparison result, locate a specified comparison type and click Export Report in the Operation column.

            You can also view comparison details of canceled comparison tasks.

            • +

            Periodic Comparison

            Periodic comparison indicates that DRS periodically compares the number of rows in the source database table with those in the destination database table and displays the comparison results.

            +
            1. On the Data Synchronization Management page, click the target synchronization task name in the Task Name/ID column.
            2. Click the Synchronization Comparison tab.
            3. Click the Periodic Comparison tab and click Modify Comparison Policy to modify the comparison policy.
            4. In the Modify Comparison Policy dialog box, enable periodic comparison, configure the comparison frequency and time, and click Yes.

              • After periodic comparison is enabled, DRS compares the number of rows at the scheduled time. You can view the comparison results on the Data-Level Comparison tab.
              • After periodic comparison is disabled, only historical comparison results can be viewed.
              • Modifications to the comparison policy settings take effect from the next comparison and do not affect the on-going periodic comparison tasks.
              • During periodic comparison, the source and destination databases will be read. Perform the comparison during off-peak hours.
              • During periodic comparison, ultra-large tables (those with more than 100 million rows) are automatically filtered out. You can use data-level comparison to spot check such large tables. It is not recommended that these large tables be compared periodically.
              +
              +

            +
            diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0300.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0300.html index e53579a1..0beace29 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0300.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0300.html @@ -4,8 +4,9 @@

            During real-time synchronization, you can reset the synchronization tasks in one of the following statuses so that you do not need to configure the tasks again.

            • Paused
            • Incremental synchronization failed

            You can reset the following DRS tasks:

            -
            • To the cloud
              • MySQL->MySQL
              • PostgreSQL->PostgreSQL
              -
            • From the cloud
              • MySQL->MySQL
              +
              • To the cloud
                • MySQL->MySQL
                • PostgreSQL->PostgreSQL
                • Oracle->PostgreSQL
                +
              • From the cloud
                • MySQL->MySQL
                • MySQL->Kafka
                +
              • Self-built -> Self-built
                • MySQL->Kafka
              • For a many-to-one synchronization task, only the parent task can be reset.
              • For a MySQL many-to-one synchronization task, only the subtask can be reset.
              • Resetting a task does not clear the destination database. You can determine whether to clear the destination database based on your service requirements. After the task is reset, a full synchronization is performed again. You do not need to configure the task again.
              diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0401.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0401.html index 8c1bbd6a..c08e21c2 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0401.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_10_0401.html @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@

              Modifying the Flow Control Mode

              You can choose whether to control the flow. DRS allows you to change the flow control mode after a task is created. Currently, only the following real-time migration types support this function:

              -
              • To the cloud
                • MySQL->MySQL
                • MySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby
                • PostgreSQL->PostgreSQL
                +
                • To the cloud
                  • MySQL->MySQL
                  • MySQL -> GaussDB(for MySQL) primary/standby
                  • Oracle->PostgreSQL
                  • PostgreSQL->PostgreSQL
                • Out of the cloud
                  • MySQL->MySQL
                • Self-built databases -> Self-built databases
                  • MySQL->MySQL
                diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0005.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0005.html index c1344905..7d3bf2d4 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0005.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0005.html @@ -42,21 +42,21 @@
            - - -
            Table 1 Task information

            Task Information

            Description

            Check whether the source database version is MongoDB 3.2.x, 3.4.x, or 4.0.x.

            +

            Check whether the source database version is MongoDB 3.2.x, 3.4.x, 3.6.x, 4.0.x, 4.2.x, or 4.4.x.

            Failure Cause and Handling Suggestion

            Failure cause: The source database version is not supported.

            -

            Handling suggestion: Check whether the source database version is MongoDB 3.2x, 3.4.x, and 4.0.x.

            +

            Handling suggestion: Check whether the source database version is MongoDB 3.2x, 3.4.x, 3.6.x, 4.0.x, 4.2.x, or 4.4.x.

            Failure cause: This item cannot be checked because the source database fails to be connected.

            -

            Handling suggestion: Check whether the source database is connected.

            +

            Failure cause: This item cannot be checked because the source database fails to be connected.

            +

            Handling suggestion: Check whether the source database is connected.

            Failure cause: The incremental data is obtained in changeStream mode but the source database version is earlier than 4.0.

            -

            Handling suggestion: In changeStream mode, ensure that the source database version is 4.0 or later.

            +

            Failure cause: The incremental data is obtained in changeStream mode but the source database version is earlier than 4.0.

            +

            Handling suggestion: In changeStream mode, ensure that the source database version is 4.0 or later.

            Failure cause: An internal error occurs.

            @@ -67,6 +67,27 @@
        +

        Oracle Synchronization

        +
        + + + + + + + + + +
        Table 3 Checking whether source database version is supported

        Check Item

        +

        Whether the source database version is supported

        +

        Description

        +

        Check whether the source database version is Oracle 10g, 11g, 12c, 18c, or 19c.

        +

        Failure Cause and Handling Suggestion

        +

        Failure cause: The source database version is not supported.

        +

        Handling suggestion: Check whether the source database version is supported. Currently, only Oracle 10g, 11g, 12c, 18c, and 19c are supported.

        +
        +
        +
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0006.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0006.html index 8bc32cc4..b3d35bbb 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0006.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0006.html @@ -42,13 +42,13 @@

    Description

    -

    Check whether the destination database version is MongoDB 3.4.x, 4.0.x, or 4.2.x.

    +

    Check whether the destination database version is MongoDB 3.4.x, 4.0.x, 4.2.x, or 4.4.x.

    Failure Cause and Handling Suggestion

    Failure cause: The destination database version is not supported.

    -

    Handling suggestion: Check whether the destination database version is MongoDB 3.4.x, 4.0.x, or 4.2.x.

    +

    Handling suggestion: Check whether the destination database version is MongoDB 3.4.x, 4.0.x, 4.2.x, or 4.4.x.

    Failure cause: This item cannot be checked because the destination database fails to be connected.

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0008.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0008.html index 480d3326..410a7615 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0008.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0008.html @@ -125,6 +125,29 @@
    +

    Oracle -> PostgreSQL Synchronization

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 4 Checking whether the destination database user has sufficient permissions

    Check Item

    +

    Whether the destination database user has sufficient permissions

    +

    Description

    +

    Check whether the destination database user permissions meet the migration requirements. If the permissions are insufficient, the migration will fail.

    +

    Failure Cause and Handling Suggestion

    +

    Failure cause: The destination database user does not have sufficient permissions.

    +

    Handling suggestions: Run the following command to grant the permissions of creating databases and tables on the destination database. Then, perform the check again.

    +
    ALTER ROLE targetUser WITH CREATEDB;
    +

    In the preceding command, targetUser indicates the current user of the destination database.

    +
    +
    +
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0013.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0013.html index e08d96b4..c7cae5c5 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0013.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0013.html @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@

    Handling suggestion: Modify the character sets.

    Run commands to modify the self-created source database.

    1. Check whether source and destination database character sets are consistent.
      show variables like "character_set_server"\G;
      -

      +

    2. Modify the character set of the source database server.
      set character_set_server='utf8';
      -

      +

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0014.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0014.html index 3667b448..2373fe5b 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0014.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0014.html @@ -31,9 +31,9 @@

    Failure cause: The binlog function is disabled on the source database.

    Handling suggestion:

    • If the source is an on-premises database, perform the following operations to enable binlog.
      1. Run the following command to check whether binlog is enabled:
        show variables like "log_bin"\G;
        -

        -
      2. If binlog is disabled, add log-bin = mysql-bin followed by [mysqld] in the MySQL configuration file my.cnf or my.ini.

        -
      3. Restart the database.

        +

        +
      4. If binlog is disabled, add log-bin = mysql-bin followed by [mysqld] in the MySQL configuration file my.cnf or my.ini.

        +
      5. Restart the database.

    • If the source is an RDS instance, enable binlog by referring to the RDS official documentation.
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0457.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0457.html index f31ae7f2..798a3af7 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0457.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0457.html @@ -4,13 +4,13 @@

    DRS real-time synchronization supports multiple topology types. You can plan the topology types as required. For details, see the following content.

    To ensure data consistency, do not modify the synchronization objects in the destination database.

    -

    One-to-One Real-Time Synchronization

    +

    One-to-One Real-Time Synchronization

    You can create a one-to-one synchronization task.

    -

    One-to-Many Real-Time Synchronization

    +

    One-to-Many Real-Time Synchronization

    You need to create multiple synchronization tasks to implement one-to-many real-time synchronization. For example, to synchronize data from instance A to instances B, C, and D, you need to create three synchronization tasks.

    -

    Many-to-One Real-Time Synchronization

    +

    Many-to-One Real-Time Synchronization

    You need to create multiple synchronization tasks to implement many-to-one real-time synchronization. For example, to synchronize data from instances B, C, and D to instance A, you need to create three synchronization tasks. Multiple tables can be synchronized to one table.

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0465.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0465.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f2156b69 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0465.html @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + +

    Checking the Physical Standby Database

    +

    Oracle Synchronization

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Physical standby database check

    Check Item

    +

    Physical standby database check

    +

    Description

    +

    If the source Oracle database is in the incremental migration phase, the instance type of the source must be the same as that of the destination. Otherwise, the migration fails.

    +

    Item to Be Confirmed and Handling Suggestion

    +

    Item to be confirmed:

    +
    1. The physical standby database does not generate logs. It replicates them from the primary database. Check whether supplemental logging of the primary database meets the incremental synchronization requirements.
    2. The physical standby database does not generate logs, resulting in synchronization task delay. You can shorten the interval for archiving logs from the primary database to the physical standby database. However, extremely low values can result in a large number of logs, so you are advised to synchronize data from the logical standby database. Run the following statement on the primary database to specify the log archive interval:
      alter system set archive_lag_target=seconds;
      +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: Database Parameters
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0471.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0471.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a023ffd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0471.html @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + +

    Checking Whether the Character Sets Are Compatible

    +

    Oracle Synchronization

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Character set compatibility check

    Check Item

    +

    Character set compatibility check

    +

    Description

    +

    The character set of the destination database is incompatible with that of the source database.

    +

    Item to Be Confirmed and Handling Suggestion

    +

    Item to be confirmed: The character set of the destination database is incompatible with that of the source database.

    +

    Handling suggestion: Change the character set of the destination database to be the same as that of the source database.

    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: Database Parameters
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0481.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0481.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7153ef24 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_11_0481.html @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + +

    Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Unsupported Table Field Types

    +

    Oracle Synchronization

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Table 1 Checking whether the source database contains unsupported table field types

    Check Item

    +

    Whether the source database contains unsupported table field types

    +

    Description

    +

    Check whether the source database contains unsupported table field types.

    +

    Failure Cause and Handling Suggestion

    +

    Failure cause: The source database contains unsupported table field types. The following table field types are supported: VARCHAR, VARCHAR2, NVARCHAR2, NUMBER, FLOAT, LONG, DATE, BINARY_FLOAT, BINARY_DOUBLE, RAW, LONG RAW, CHAR, NCHAR, CLOB, NCLOB, BLOB, ROWID, TIMESTAMP, TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE and TIMESTAMP WITH LOCAL TIME ZONE.

    +

    Handling suggestion: Select other tables that can be synchronized.

    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    Parent topic: Database Parameters
    +
    +
    + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_12_0008.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_12_0008.html index 202fb7fc..1a7d46ea 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_12_0008.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_12_0008.html @@ -62,14 +62,22 @@
  • Checking Whether the max_allowed_packet Value of the Destination Database Is too Small
    • +
  • Checking Whether the Source Database Character Set Is Supported
    +
  • Checking Whether the Databases and Tables Exist
  • Checking Whether session_replication_role of the Destination Database Is correctly Set
  • Checking Whether the MongoDB Instance Type Matches the Migration Mode
    • +
  • Checking the Physical Standby Database
    +
  • Checking Whether the Values of group_concat_max_len Are Consistent
    • +
  • Checking Whether the Character Sets Are Compatible
    +
    • +
  • Checking Whether the Source Database Contains Unsupported Table Field Types
    +
  • Checking Replication Attribute of Primary Key Columns
    • diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_12_0009.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_12_0009.html index 4cbd425a..262479d6 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_12_0009.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_12_0009.html @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@

    If the query result is empty, the streaming replication slot is deleted.

    -

    Synchronizing Sequence Values

    If sequence objects are not synchronized or the destination database is GaussDB(for openGauss), skip this section.

    +

    Synchronizing Sequence Values

    If sequence objects are not synchronized or the destination database is GaussDB, skip this section.

    1. Use a high-privilege account (with the USAGE permission for all sequences) to connect to the source database and run the following statement:

      select 'SELECT pg_catalog.setval('||quote_literal(quote_ident(n.nspname)||'.'||quote_ident(c.relname))||', '||nextval(c.oid)||');' as sqls from pg_class c join pg_namespace n on c.relnamespace=n.oid where c.relkind = 'S' and n.nspname !~'^pg_' and n.nspname<>'information_schema' and not (c.relname='hwdrs_ddl_info_id_seq' and n.nspname='public') order by n.nspname, c.relname;

      The query result is the SQL statement that needs to be executed in the destination database.

    2. Log in to the destination database as the destination database user used in the synchronization task and run the SQL statement queried in 1 in the destination database.
    3. Run the following statement in the destination database to check the sequence value synchronization result:

      SELECT n.nspname, c.relname, nextval(c.oid) from pg_class c join pg_namespace n on c.relnamespace=n.oid where c.relkind = 'S' and n.nspname !~'^pg_' and n.nspname<>'information_schema' order by 1,2;
      diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0001.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0001.html index 1c341e97..9ab93406 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0001.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0001.html @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ print("waiting..."); sleep(1000); } -
      • If the command output is waiting, the balancer is migrating chunks. In this case, do not disable the balancer. Otherwise, data inconsistency may occur.
        Figure 1 Viewing the command output
        +
        • If the command output is waiting, the balancer is migrating chunks. In this case, do not disable the balancer. Otherwise, data inconsistency may occur.
          Figure 1 Viewing the command output
        • If no command output is displayed, the balancer is not migrating any chunks. In this case, you can disable the balancer:

      • Disable the balancer.

        • If you migrate the entire DB instance, run the following command to disable the balancer.
          sh.stopBalancer()
        • If you need to disable the balancer of the sharded collections to be migrated, run the following command:
          sh.disableBalancing("database.collection")
          diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0103.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0103.html index 5ab8a3be..2535c076 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0103.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0103.html @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
          • A region is a physical data center. Each region is completely independent, improving fault tolerance and stability. After a resource is created, its region cannot be changed.
          • An AZ is a physical location using independent power supplies and networks. Faults in an AZ do not affect other AZs. A region can contain multiple AZs, which are physically isolated but interconnected through internal networks. This ensures the independence of AZs and provides low-cost and low-latency network connections.

          Figure 1 shows the relationship between regions and AZs.

          -
          Figure 1 Region and AZ
          +
          Figure 1 Region and AZ

    Selecting a Region

    You are advised to select a region close to you or your target users. This reduces network latency and improves access rate.

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0120.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0120.html index 7d14379c..d399256c 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0120.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_0120.html @@ -5,10 +5,10 @@

    Operation Suggestions

    • To ensure that there is sufficient space during task creation, you are advised to calculate the total data volume of the source database and plan how to allocate the disk space of the destination instance. The remaining disk space must be greater than the total data volume of the source database. For example, if the data volume of source system1 is 1 GB, the data volume of source system2 is 3 GB, and the data volume of source system3 is 6 GB, the remaining disk space of the destination instance must be greater than 10 GB.
    • To improve the performance of the destination MySQL database, you are advised to use the Save Change function to configure common parameters (except max_connections). For performance parameters, you need to manually change the parameter values based on the specifications of the destination database.
    • When you create a many-to-one synchronization task, the task created later may block the task created earlier. This is because each synchronization task involves index creation. When an index is created, a schema lock may occur on the destination database, which blocks the synchronization of other tables in the schema. As a result, the previously created tasks cannot be synchronized. To avoid this problem, you are advised to set Start Time to Start at a specified time to start a task during off-peak hours.
    • For many-to-one synchronization tasks that involve the synchronization of the same table, DDL operations cannot be performed on source databases. Otherwise, all synchronization tasks fail.

    Many-to-One Data Migration

    Data migration aims to migrate the entire database. Multiple databases can be migrated at the instance level. Databases with the same name in the source system cannot be migrated and database name mapping is not supported.

    -
    Figure 1 Many-to-one data migration
    +
    Figure 1 Many-to-one data migration

    Flow Chart

    When creating a task, ensure that the second task is created after the first task has entered the full migration state.

    -
    Figure 2 Flow chart
    +
    Figure 2 Flow chart
    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1130.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1130.html index e5c7bfee..d1ad9b5d 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1130.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1130.html @@ -15,11 +15,16 @@

    TINYBLOB, BLOB, MEDIUMBLOB, LONGBLOB, TINYTEXT, TEXT, MEDIUMTEXT, LONGTEXT

    -

    GaussDB(for openGauss)

    +

    GaussDB

    TEXT, CLOB, BLOB, BYTEA, INTERVAL DAY TO SECOND, INTERVAL

    +

    Oracle

    + +

    BLOB, NCLOB, CLOB, LONG RAW, LONG, INTERVAL DAY TO SECOND, INTERVAL YEAR TO MONTH, UROWID, BFILE, XMLTYPE, SDO_GEOMETRY

    + +

    MongoDB

    _id is of the bindata type.

    @@ -41,11 +46,16 @@

    TINYBLOB, BLOB, MEDIUMBLOB, LONGBLOB, TINYTEXT, TEXT, MEDIUMTEXT, LONGTEXT, FLOAT

    -

    GaussDB(for openGauss)

    +

    GaussDB

    TEXT, CLOB, BLOB, BYTEA, INTERVAL DAY TO SECOND, INTERVAL, REAL, DOUBLE PRECISION, BOOL, TIME, TIMETZ, TIMESTAMP, TIMESTAMPTZ, DATE

    +

    Oracle

    + +

    BLOB, NCLOB, CLOB, LONG RAW, LONG, INTERVAL DAY TO SECOND, INTERVAL YEAR TO MONTH, UROWID, BFILE, XMLTYPE, SDO_GEOMETRY, BINARY_FLOAT, BINARY_DOUBLE, FLOAT, RAW, TIMESTAMP, TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE, TIMESTAMP WITH LOCAL TIME ZONE, DATE

    + +

    PostgreSQL

    REAL, DOUBLE PRECISION, MONEY, TEXT, BYTEA, TIMESTAMP WITHOUT TIME ZONE, TIMESTAMP WITH TIME ZONE, DATE, TIME WITHOUT TIME ZONE, TIME WITH TIME ZONE, INTERVAL, BOOLEAN, ENUMERATED TYPES, POINT, LINE, LSEG, BOX, PATH, POLYGON, CIRCLE, CIDR, INET, MACADDR, MACADDR8, BIT, BIT VARYING, TSVECTOR, TSQUERY, XML, JSON, ARRAY, COMPOSITE TYPES, INT4RANGE, INT8RANGE, NUMRANGE, TSRANGE, TSTZRANGE, DATERANGE

    diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1145.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1145.html index cbcab322..ec3e81b1 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1145.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1145.html @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
  • In the incremental phase, there is no pressure on the source database. Only one dump connection is available to listen to binlog incremental data in real time.
    • -

    Impact on the Destination Database

    • During the initialization of a full migration or synchronization task, DRS needs to write structures, inventory data, and indexes of the source database to the destination database in sequence. Generally, the total number of sessions is less than 16.
      • Fewer than eight sessions are used to create structures.
      • Fewer than eight sessions are writing data. Example:
        insert into xxx (id,name,msg) valus (xxx);
        +

        Impact on the Destination Database

        • During the initialization of a full migration or synchronization task, DRS needs to write structures, inventory data, and indexes of the source database to the destination database in sequence. Generally, the total number of sessions is less than 16.
          • Fewer than eight sessions are used to create structures.
          • Fewer than eight sessions are writing data. Example:
            insert into xxx (id,name,msg) values (xxx);
          • Fewer than eight sessions are used to create indexes. Example:
            alter table xxx add index xxx;
        • In the incremental phase, DRS parses the incremental data in the binlog file of the source database into SQL statements and executes the SQL statements in the destination database. Generally, the total number of sessions is less than 64.
          • DDL statements are executed in serial mode. When a DDL statement is executed, no other DML statement is executed.
          • There are a maximum of 64 DML connections (short connections with a timeout interval of 30 seconds). The DML statements include insert, update, delete, and replace.
          diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1148.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1148.html index e244409f..f1da68a1 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1148.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1148.html @@ -4,14 +4,14 @@

          Causes for an Increase in RTO

          Recovery Time Objective (RTO) is duration of time within which transactions on the DRS instance are transmitted and replayed to the destination database during incremental synchronization. If the RTO value is large, transactions to be replayed on the DRS instance are stacked. The possible causes are as follows:

          1. After a DR task is initialized, the incremental data generated from the time when the DR task is started to the current time needs to be replayed.
          2. Batch operations are performed on service database tables that do not have primary keys. The DR instance is synchronizing tables that do not have primary keys and have a large amount of changed data. To ensure data consistency in tables without primary keys, all operations are recorded. As a result, the operation execution efficiency is lower than that in tables with primary keys. In addition, if the destination table has no index, the data update efficiency is lower.
          3. If the DDL operation is performed on the service database, the DR instance can replay data only after the execution of the DDL operation is complete.
          4. Frequently executed operations are performed on hot tables in the service database. The DR instance combines the transactions of the hot table and then replays the transactions, reducing frequent operations on the destination database.
          5. The access to the DR database is abnormal. As a result, the incremental data cannot be replayed.
          -

          Handling Suggestion

          1. On the Disaster Recovery Management page, click the target DR task in the Task Name/ID column.
          2. On the Basic Information page, click the Disaster Recovery Monitoring tab to view the changes of RTO.

            • If RTO decreases gradually or increases only in a short time, no action is required.
            • If RTO keeps increasing, run the following statement in the DR database to check whether there are SQL statements that take a long time to execute or DDL statements that are being executed:
              show processlist
              +

              Handling Suggestion for an Increase in RTO

              1. On the Disaster Recovery Management page, click the target DR task in the Task Name/ID column.
              2. On the Basic Information page, click the Disaster Recovery Monitoring tab to view the changes of RTO.

                • If RTO decreases gradually or increases only in a short time, no action is required.
                • If RTO keeps increasing, run the following statement in the DR database to check whether there are SQL statements that take a long time to execute or DDL statements that are being executed:
                  show processlist
                • If the DR database is abnormal, contact database O&M engineers.

              Causes for an Increase in RPO

              Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the time that passes from when a transaction in the service database is submitted and the time when the transaction is synchronized to the DRS instance during the incremental synchronization. If RPO is large, the latest changes made to the service database data have not been extracted to the DR instance. The possible causes are as follows:

              1. The network between the service database and the DRS DR instance is unstable. Reading changes in logs from the service database is slow.
              2. The service database cannot be accessed. As a result, incremental data cannot be extracted.
              -

              Handling Suggestion

              1. On the Disaster Recovery Management page, click the target DR task in the Task Name/ID column.
              2. On the Basic Information page, click the Disaster Recovery Monitoring tab to view the changes of RPO.

                • If RPO decreases gradually or increases only in a short time, no action is required.
                • If the service database is abnormal, contact database O&M engineers.
                +

                Handling Suggestion for an Increase in RPO

                1. On the Disaster Recovery Management page, click the target DR task in the Task Name/ID column.
                2. On the Basic Information page, click the Disaster Recovery Monitoring tab to view the changes of RPO.

                  • If RPO decreases gradually or increases only in a short time, no action is required.
                  • If the service database is abnormal, contact database O&M engineers.

              diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1151.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1151.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e24ed8e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1151.html @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ + + +

              Why Do I Use the SCAN IP Address to Connect to an Oracle RAC Cluster?

              +

              If the source Oracle database is an RAC cluster, you are advised to use SCAN IP+SERVICE_NAMES to create a task because SCAN IP has stronger fault tolerance, better load balancing capability, and faster synchronization.

              +
              • If the SCAN IP address is used, ensure that the SCAN IP address can communicate with all virtual IP addresses of the source database. Otherwise, the connection test cannot be passed.
              • If SCAN IP is not used, the virtual IP address of a node can be used. If other nodes are abnormal, the synchronization process is not affected.
              +

              For details about the SCAN IP address, see the documents on the Oracle official website.

              +
              +
              +
              +
              Parent topic: Real-Time Synchronization
              +
              +
              + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1155.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1155.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a6e86386 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_16_1155.html @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + +

              How Do I Check Supplemental Logging of the Source Oracle Database?

              +

              In physical standby mode, the Oracle database directly replicates logs from the primary database and does not generate any logs. If the source is an Oracle database, you need to check whether supplemental logging on the primary database meets the requirements to ensure that the task can run properly. The following lists the check and setting methods:

              +

              Table level: This setting applies to a specified table.

              +

              Database level: This setting applies to the database level.

              +

              PK/UI: In addition to the changed columns, the values of the primary key and unique key of each row are recorded.

              +

              ALL: Each row of the log records the values of all columns in that row.

              +

              DRS incremental synchronization requirements can be met if any of the following checks are passed.

              +
              +

              Table-level PK/UI Supplemental Logging Check (Minimum Requirement)

              Check whether supplemental logging of the table-level objects to be synchronized meets the requirements.

              +
              1. Run the following SQL statement in the source database:

                select * from ALL_LOG_GROUPS where (LOG_GROUP_TYPE='UNIQUE KEY LOGGING' or LOG_GROUP_TYPE='PRIMARY KEY LOGGING') and OWNER='Schema name in uppercase' and TABLE_NAME='Table name in uppercase';
                +

                If the table name corresponds to the records whose LOG_GROUP_TYPE is UNIQUE KEY LOGGING and PRIMARY KEY LOGGING in the query result, the DRS incremental synchronization requirements are met.

                +

              2. If the requirements are not met, run the following SQL statement to enable table-level PK/UI logging:

                alter database add supplemental log data; 
+alter table Schema_name.Table_name add supplemental log data(primary key,unique) columns;
                +

                In the preceding command, Schema_name.Table_name should replace with some existing schema names and table names.

                +
                +

              +
              +

              All Table-Level Supplemental Log Check

              Check whether supplemental logging of the table-level objects to be synchronized meets the requirements.

              +
              1. Run the following SQL statement in the source database:

                select * from ALL_LOG_GROUPS where LOG_GROUP_TYPE='ALL COLUMN LOGGING' and OWNER='Schema_name in uppercase' and TABLE_NAME='Table name in uppercase';
                +

                If the table name is recorded in the query result, the DRS incremental synchronization requirements can be met.

                +

              2. If the requirements are not met, run the following SQL statement to enable all column supplemental logging at the table level:

                alter database add supplemental log data; 
+alter table Schema_name.Table_name add supplemental log data(all) columns;
                +

                In the preceding command, Schema_name.Table_name should replace with some existing schema names and table names.

                +
                +

              +
              +

              Database-level Supplemental Log Check

              For the database-level objects to be synchronized, check whether supplemental logging meets the requirements.

              +
              1. Run the following SQL statement in the source database:

                select SUPPLEMENTAL_LOG_DATA_MIN MIN, SUPPLEMENTAL_LOG_DATA_PK PK, SUPPLEMENTAL_LOG_DATA_UI UI, SUPPLEMENTAL_LOG_DATA_ALL ALL_LOG from v$database;
                +

              2. Either of the following requirements must be met:

                • If both PK and UI are set to YES, DRS incremental synchronization requirements can be met.
                  If the requirements are not met, run the following SQL statement to enable database-level PK/UI supplemental logging:
                  alter database add supplemental log data(primary key, unique) columns;
                  +
                  +
                • If ALL_LOG is set to YES, DRS incremental synchronization requirements can be met.
                  If the requirements are not met, run the following SQL statement to enable all column supplemental logging at the database level:
                  alter database add supplemental log data(all) columns;
                  +
                  +
                +

              +
              +
              +
              +
              +
              Parent topic: Real-Time Synchronization
              +
              +
              + diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_change_history.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_change_history.html index 60cef180..b4c9bcc5 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_change_history.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_change_history.html @@ -8,7 +8,37 @@ -

              2022-10-30

              +

              2023-11-17

              + +

              This issue is the twelfth official release, which incorporates the following changes:

              +
              • Supported real-time migration of DDS 4.4.
              + + +

              2023-10-17

              + +

              This issue is the eleventh official release, which incorporates the following changes:

              +
              • Supported real-time migration from MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL).
              • Supported periodic comparison.
              + + +

              2023-05-23

              + +

              This issue is the tenth official release, which incorporates the following changes:

              +
              • Added DMS for Kafka as the Destination DB.
              + + +

              2023-02-10

              + +

              This issue is the ninth official release, which incorporates the following changes:

              +
              • Added the procedure for real-time synchronization from Oracle to PostgreSQL.
              + + +

              2022-12-06

              + +

              This issue is the eighth official release, which incorporates the following changes:

              +
              • Supported real-time synchronization from Oracle to PostgreSQL.
              • Supported real-time synchronization from MySQL to Kafka.
              + + +

              2022-08-30

              This issue is the seventh official release, which incorporates the following change:

              • Supported real-time synchronization from PostgreSQL to PostgreSQL.
              @@ -35,13 +65,13 @@

              2020-11-13

              This issue is the third official release, which incorporates the following change:

              -

              Supported two-way synchronization between MySQL and GaussDB(for openGauss).

              +

              Supported two-way synchronization between MySQL and GaussDB.

              2020-07-31

              This issue is the second official release, which incorporates the following changes:

              -
              • Supported synchronization from MySQL to GaussDB(for openGauss).
              • Supported Cassandra disaster recovery.
              • Supported disaster recovery from MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL).
              +
              • Supported synchronization from MySQL to GaussDB.
              • Supported Cassandra disaster recovery.
              • Supported disaster recovery from MySQL to GaussDB(for MySQL).

              2019-11-30

              diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/drs_online_migration.html b/docs/drs/umn/drs_online_migration.html index 38f43240..a650e0f6 100644 --- a/docs/drs/umn/drs_online_migration.html +++ b/docs/drs/umn/drs_online_migration.html @@ -6,6 +6,8 @@ diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773989.jpg b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470364.jpg similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773989.jpg rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470364.jpg diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391774069.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470404.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391774069.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470404.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094428.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470416.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094428.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470416.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391693965.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470616.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391693965.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470616.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094488.gif b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470624.gif similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094488.gif rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470624.gif diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254148.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470628.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254148.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470628.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094436.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470728.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094436.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470728.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094684.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470864.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094684.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470864.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391694037.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470892.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391694037.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470892.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341574036.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470900.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341574036.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470900.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094536.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470984.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094536.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470984.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414096.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470992.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414096.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710470992.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391693933.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471004.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391693933.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471004.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341574092.jpg b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471040.jpg similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341574092.jpg rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471040.jpg diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391854125.jpg b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471044.jpg similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391854125.jpg rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471044.jpg diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391694017.jpg b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471048.jpg similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391694017.jpg rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471048.jpg diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534301.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471092.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534301.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710471092.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254208.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710629852.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254208.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710629852.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094628.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710629888.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094628.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710629888.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391853873.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630012.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391853873.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630012.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630028.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630028.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4b60462 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630028.png differ diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391854173.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630116.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391854173.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630116.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341574056.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630288.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341574056.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630288.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094584.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630300.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094584.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630300.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254064.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630464.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254064.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630464.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773997.jpg b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630532.jpg similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773997.jpg rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630532.jpg diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254212.jpg b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630536.jpg similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254212.jpg rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630536.jpg diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254308.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630596.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254308.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710630596.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534429.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710631156.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534429.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001710631156.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414072.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429493.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414072.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429493.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414140.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429533.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414140.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429533.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341573876.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429581.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341573876.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429581.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773741.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429613.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773741.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429613.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429637.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429637.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7df65d20 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429637.png differ diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341574132.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429649.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341574132.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429649.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391694041.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429757.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391694041.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429757.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254040.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429769.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341254040.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429769.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534285.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429809.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534285.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758429809.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391693901.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430021.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391693901.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430021.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391854129.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430133.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391854129.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430133.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094552.jpg b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430137.jpg similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094552.jpg rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430137.jpg diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534445.jpg b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430141.jpg similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534445.jpg rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430141.jpg diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534173.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430177.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534173.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430177.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391853989.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430185.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391853989.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430185.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391693937.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430197.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391693937.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758430197.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534441.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549285.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534441.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549285.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414188.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549321.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414188.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549321.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773841.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549373.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773841.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549373.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391694113.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549389.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391694113.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549389.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773837.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549405.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773837.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549405.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549461.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549461.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6b2287d4 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549461.png differ diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549465.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549465.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e0b9cfeb Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549465.png differ diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094500.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549529.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341094500.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549529.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414136.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549585.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414136.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549585.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534273.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549597.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391534273.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549597.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773845.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549857.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391773845.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549857.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391853909.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549869.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391853909.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549869.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414112.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549965.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341414112.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549965.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341573856.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549989.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001341573856.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549989.png diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549997.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549997.png new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9de4b863 Binary files /dev/null and b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758549997.png differ diff --git a/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391774109.png b/docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758550585.png similarity index 100% rename from docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001391774109.png rename to docs/drs/umn/en-us_image_0000001758550585.png